W POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS W MODULAR ...

ALEA 

CONNECTING COMPETENCE. 

W POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

W MODULAR CONTACTORS 

w MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

w THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 

W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 

W MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A 

ENERGY INDUSTRY BUILDINGS SAFETY DATA CABLE LIGHT

GENERAL INFORMATION 

W WELCOME TO SCHRACK TECHNIK 

We are a leading, sales-oriented brand company from Austria specialising in the areas of energy, data and lighting systems. 

Our activities focus on products and solutions for energy optimisation, safety, data transfer and comfort. High-quality 

products, technical expertise and one-to-one customer service are at the fore of what we do. 

W SCHRACK PRODUCT QUALITY 

We offer our customers a well sorted product range offering the highest levels of product availability. Our aim is ultraefficiency 

when it comes to customerspecific solutions. This is possible thanks to standardized work processes, modularisation 

and the use of software aids. 

W SCHRACK ISO-CERTIFIZIED 

In recent times, testing procedures for ISO certification have shifted their focus very strongly on how organisations deal with 

customers, and the associated customer processes. Some of the major areas which are inspected include: 

General customer communication 

Dealing with offers and tenders in a structured manner 

Transparency in all areas of the company in direct or indirect contact with customers 

The above is required in all tiers of management 

ISO certification is by no means the norm. Our ISO certification 9001:2000 is both a reward as well as an obligation. The 

obligation we have in accepting this certification is to ensure the documentation of our work processes and to continuously 

improve such processes. 

W GENERAL INFORMATION 

All dimensioned drawings are displayed within the confines of available space on the page and are only intended as a guide. 

All circuit diagrams are schematic wiring diagrams which are intended to allow better understanding of the function, and 

will need to be edited/added to during the course of project planning. 

All images represent samples of the product and are intended for information purposes only. 

Unless otherwise stipulated, the current version of the General Terms of Delivery issued by The Association of the Austrian Electrical 

and Electronics Industries “FEEI” shall apply. No liability for errors in text, type or images; we reserve the right to make changes to technical 

specifications of the product range. The user information contained in this catalog reflect the opinion of the company at the time 

of writing. The information contained in it was assembled on the basis of published norms, specialist industry presentations, specialist 

literature and in-house expertise. The content is for informational purposes only and has no validity in law.

w ALEA POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

INDEX 

OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................ Page 4 

GENERAL INFORMATIONS.......................................................................................... Page 13 

PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ............................................................................ Page 18 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... Page 33 

DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ Page 100 

SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ Page 112 

w BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS 





w LA MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 





w ALEA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 

OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................ Page 144 




ACCESSORIES............................................................................................................ Page 156 

CHARACTERISTIC CURVES .......................................................................................... Page 157 



w LA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 





w ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A 

OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................ Page 170 




ACCESSORIES............................................................................................................ Page 188 

CHARACTERISTIC CURVES .......................................................................................... Page 190 



w INDEX 

ALPHABETICAL INDEX ................................................................................................ Page 196 

LIST OF ARTICLES ...................................................................................................... Page 198 

Page 

1

Page 

2 

ALEA POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

TOP-TECHNIC 

LSHD / LSHD-PLC 

TOP-TECHNIC 

LSD0 / LSS0-PLC 

TOP-TECHNIC 

TOP-TECHNIC 

LSDD / LSSD-PLC 

TOP-TECHNIC 

LSD2 / LSD3 / LSD6 

TOP-TECHNIC 

LSDE / LSDG LSDH

ALEA POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

ALEA POWER AND 

AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

w CONTENTS 

OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. Page 4 

GENERAL INFORMATIONS ............................................................................ Page 13 

PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ........................................................ Page 18 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................... Page 33 

DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 100 

SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 112 

Page 

3

Page 

4 

POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

W CONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3-POLE – OVERVIEW 

SIZE 00 00 0 2 

TYPE LSHD LSDD / LSSD 1) CONTACTORS AND VACUUM CONTACTORS 

LSD0 / LSS0 LSD2 

TYPE / AC, DC OPERATION 

AC-3 

06 07 09 12 09 12 17 25 32 40 50 

Ie/AC-3/400 V 6A 7A 9A 12A 9A 12A 17A 25A 32A 40A 50A 

400 V 3A 3kW 4kW 5.5kW 4kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW 

230 V -- 2.2kW 3kW 3kW 3kW 3kW 4kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW 

500 V 2A 3.5kW 4.5kW 5.5kW 4.5kW 7.5kW 10kW 11kW 18.5kW 22kW 30kW 

690 V 1A 4kW 5.5kW 5.5kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 11kW 18.5kW 22kW 22kW 

1 000 V 

AC-4 (FOR IA = 6 X IE) 

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 

400 V -- 3kW 4kW 4kW 4kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 7.5kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW 

400 V (200 000 operating cycles) 

AC-1 (40 °C, ≤ 690 V) 

-- 1.15kW 2kW 2kW 2kW 2.6kW 3.5kW 4.4kW 8.2kW 9.5kW 12.6kW 

Ie 

ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS 

10A 18A 22A 22A 40A 40A 40A 40A 50A 60A 60A 

AUXILIARY CONTACTS front LSZDH.. LSZDH.../LSZDD.../LSZD0 LSZ0D... LSZ0D... 

AND CONTACT BLOCKS LSZD0.. 

lateral -- -- LSZ0D7.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ0D9.. 

TERMINAL COVERS -- -- -- LSZ2D... 

SURGE SUPPRESSORS LSZH0... 

OVERLOAD RELAYS (PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: OVERLOAD RELAYS) 

LSZD.... LSZ0.... LSZ2D.... 

LST, thermal, Class 10 -- LSTD.... 0.1 ... 12 A LST0.... 2.5 ... 25 A LST2.... 10 ... 50 A 

MOTOR STARTER PROTECTORS (PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: MOTOR STARTER PROTECTORS) 

TYPE BES -- BESD 0.16 ... 12 A Size 00 

BESD 0.16 ... 12 A Size 0 

BES0 0.16 ... 25 A BES2 25 ... 50 A 

LINK MODULES LSZ 

REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 

-- LSZDD005, LSZDD006 LSZ0D002 (AC), LSZ0D004 (DC) LSZ2D004 (AC), LSZ2D005 (DC) 

COMPLETE UNITS TYPE LSW -- LSWD07.. LSWD09.. LSWD12.. -- LSW012.. LSW017.. LSW025.. LSW232.. LSW240.. LSW250.. 

400 V -- 3kW 4kW 5.5kW -- 5.5kW 7.5kW 12kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW 

WIRING SETS -- LSZDW001 LSZDW001 LSZ2W001 

MECHANICAL INTERLOCKS 

CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES FOR WYE-DELTA STARTING 

-- in wiring set included LSZ0W002 LSZ0W002 

COMPLETE UNITS TYPE LSY -- LSYD17.. LSY032.. LSY25033 

400 V -- 7.5kW 15kW 22kW 

WIRING SETS -- LSZDW001 LSZ0Y001 LSZ2Y003 

1) no auxillary contacts for PLC-use types possible 

LSHD / LSHD-PLC 1) LSDD / LSSD-PLC 1) LSD0 / LSS0-PLC LSD2


W CONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3-POLE – OVERVIEW 

3 6 10 12 14 

LSD3 LSD6 LSDE LSDG LSDH 

65 80 95 11 15 2) 19 2) 22 26 30 41 51 63/64 82/83 

65A 80A 95A 115A 150A 185A 225A 265A 300A 400A 500A 630A 820A 

30kW 37kW 45kW 55kW 75kW 90kW 110kW 132kW 160kW 200kW 250kW 335kW 450kW 

18.5kW 22kW 22kW 37kW 45kW 55kW 55kW 75kW 90kW 132kW 160kW 200kW 260kW 


45kW 55kW 55kW 110kW 132kW 160kW 200kW 250kW 250kW 400kW 400/500kW 600kW 800kW 

30kW 37kW 37kW 75kW 90kW 90kW 90/315kW 132/355kW 132/400kW 250/560kW 250/710kW 600kW 800kW 


15.1kW 17.9kW 22kW 29kW 38kW 45kW 54/78kW 66/93kW 71/112kW 84/140kW 98/161kW 168kW 191kW 

100A 120A 120A 160A 185A 215A 275/330A 330A 330A 430/610A 610A 700A 910A 

LSZ0D... LSZ0D... LSZ0D... LSZ0D... -- 

LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. -- 

LSZ3D... LSZ6D... LSZED... LSZED... LSZHD... 

LSZ2.... LSZ6.... LSZ6.... LSZ6.... included 

LST3 25 ... 100 A -- -- -- -- 

BES3 63 ... 100 A -- -- -- -- 

LS3D003 (AC), LS3D004 (DC) 

LSW365.. LSW380.. LSW395.. -- -- -- -- 

30kW 37kW 45kW -- -- -- -- 

LSZ3W001 -- -- -- -- 

LSZ0W002 -- -- -- -- 

-- -- -- -- -- 

-- -- -- -- -- 

-- -- -- -- -- 

2) without box-terminals 

LSD3 LSD6 LSDE LSDG LSDH 

Page 

5

Page 

6 


W LSDD CONTACTORS, LSSD CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE AND 

LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW 

W SIZE 00 WITH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES 

The ALEA generation of controls is a complete, modular system family, logically designed right down to the last detail, from 

the basic units to the accessories. 

1. Contactor LSDD 

2. Contactor LSSD and auxiliary contactors LSHD 

8. 1-pole auxiliary contact block, cable entry from below 

10. 4-pole auxiliary contact block (terminal designations 

according to EN 50005 and EN 50012) 

13. Solder pin adapter for contactors and auxiliary contactors 

16. Surge suppressor 

17. 3-phase feeder terminal 

18. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, without terminal 

19. Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with terminal 


For contactors LSDD 

For LSSD contactors for PLC-use and 

LSHD auxiliary contactors


W LSD0, LSD2, LSD3 AND LSS0 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE – OVERVIEW 

W SIZES 0 TO 3 WITH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES 

For sizes 0 to 3: 

1. Contactor, size 0 





10. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, without 

connection terminal 


12. 2-pole auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable left or 

right (terminal designations according to EN 50012) 

13. Single-pole auxiliary contact (up to 4 can be snapped on) 

14. Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable 

16. Wiring modules on the top and bottom (reversing duty) 

17. Surge suppressor (varistor, RC element, diode assembly), 

can be mounted on the top or bottom (different for 

size 0, 2 and 3) 

Only for sizes 2 and 3: 

22. Terminal cover for box terminals 

Only for size 3: 

23. Terminal cover for cable lugs and busbar connections 

24. Auxiliary conductor terminal, 3-pole 

Accessories identical for sizes 0 to 3 

Accessories different according to size 

Page 

7

Page 

8 


W LSD6, LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW 

W SIZES 6 TO 12 WITH ACCESSORIES 

1. LSD6, LSDE, LSDG contactors, sizes 6, 10 and 12 



6. Single-pole auxiliary contact (up to 4 can be snapped on) 

7. 2-pole auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable left or 

right (terminal designations according to EN 50012) 

(identical for sizes 0 to 12) 

8. Surge suppressor (RC element), for plugging into top of 

withdrawable coil 

9. Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection, 

different for sizes 6, 10 and 12 

10. Terminal cover for box terminal, different for sizes 6, 10 

and 12 

11. Box terminal block, different for sizes 6, 10 and 12 



Accessories different according to size

W LSD CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW 


W LSW CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, LSD CONTACTORS SIZE 6 WITH ACCESSORIES 

1. LSD contactors, size 6 


3. Wiring modules on the top and bottom 

4. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, with through 

hole 




and 12 

7. Box terminal block, different for sizes 6, 10 and 12 


Accessories different according to size 

Page 

9

Page 

10 


W LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW 

W LSW CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, LSD CONTACTORS SIZE 10 AND 12 WITH ACCESSORIES 

1. LSD contactors, sizes 10 and 12 or LSD 


3. Wiring modules on the top and bottom 

4. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, with through 

hole 


and 12 




Accessories different according to size

W LSD CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW 

W LSD CONTACTORS SIZES 6 TO 12 WITH ACCESSORIES 

1. LSD6, LSDE, LSDG contactors, sizes 6, 10 and 12 

3. Withdrawable coils for LSD contactors with conventional 

operating mechanism 

6. Surge suppressor (RC element), plug-mountable on 

withdrawable coils 


Identical for sizes 6 to 12 

Different according to size 

Page 

11

Page 

12 


W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW 

The ALEA generation of controls is a complete, modular system family, logically designed right down to the last detail, from 

the basic units to the accessories. 

W AC AND DC OPERATION 

IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660) 

The LSHD Auxiliary contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. 

The LSHD Auxiliary contactors have screw or Cage Clamp terminals. Four contacts are available in the basic unit. 

(Cage Clamp on request) 

W AUXILIARY CONTACTORS SIZE 00, WITH ACCESSORIES 

1. Auxiliary contactor 

2. Auxiliary contactor for PLC-use 

8. 1-pole auxiliary contact block, cable entry from below 

10. 4-pole auxiliary contact block (terminal designations according to EN 50005) 

13. Solder pin adapter for aux iliary 

contactor 

16. Surge suppressor


W LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW – 

GENERAL INFORMATIONS 

W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, SIZES 00 TO 3, UP TO 45 kW 

AC AND DC OPERATION 

IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660). The LSD contactors are climate-proof. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Size 

size 00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the basic unit. The basic units of sizes 0 to 3 contain only the main 

current paths. All basic units can be extended with auxiliary contacts and contact blocks. 

CONNECTION METHODS 

The LSD contactors are available with screw terminals (box terminals and connecting bars) or with Cage Clamp terminals. 

The size 3 contactors have removable box terminals for the main conductor connections. This permits connection of ring 

terminal lugs or busbars. 

CONTACT RELIABILITY 

If voltages ≤ 110 V and current ≤ 100 mA are to be switched, the auxiliary contacts of the LSD contactor or LSH auxiliary 

contactor should be used as they guarantee a high level of contact reliability. These auxiliary contacts are suitable for solidstate 

circuits with currents ≥ 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V. 

SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION OF THE CONTACTORS 

Short-circuit protection of the contactors without overload relay, see Technical specifications. For short-circuit protection of 

the contactors with overload relay, see "Thermal Overload Relays". To assemble fuseless motor feeders you must select 

combinations of motor protection switches (MPS) and contactor. 

MOTOR PROTECTION 

LST thermal overload relays can be fitted to the LSD contactors for protection against overload. The overload relays must be 

ordered separately. 

RATINGS OF INDUCTION MOTORS 

The quoted rating (in kW) refers to the output power on the motor shaft (according to the nameplate). 

SURGE SUPPRESSION 

LSD contactors can be retrofitted with RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (assembly of diode and Zener diode 

for short break times) for damping opening surges in the coil. The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size 00 

contactors. Space is provided for them next to a snap-on auxiliary contact block. For sizes 0 to 3 contactors, varistors and 

RC elements can be snapped on either on the top or directly below the coil terminals. Diode assemblies are available in 2 

different versions on account of their polarity. Depending on the application they can be connected either only at the 

bottom (assembly with MPS) or only at the top (assembly with overload relay). The plug-in direction of the diodes and diode 

assemblies is specified by coding. 

Exceptions: 

LSZD0006, in this case the plug-in direction is marked with "+" and "-" 

Auxiliary contactors are supplied either without surge suppression or with a varistor or diode connected as standard, 

according to the version. 

Note: 

The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are 

damped against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms). 

Page 

13

Page 

14 




W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, SIZES 6 TO 12, > 45 TO 250 kW 

LSD contactors for switching motors 

LSR contactors for AC-1 applications 

UC OPERATION 

The contactors can be operated with AC (40 to 60 Hz) as well as with DC. 

WITHDRAWABLE COILS 

For simple coil replacement, e.g. if the application is replaced, the magnetic coil can be pulled out upwards after the release 

mechanism has been actuated and can be replaced by any other coil of the same size. 

AUXILIARY CONTACT COMPLEMENT 

The contactors can be fitted with up to 8 auxiliary contacts (identical auxiliary contact blocks from sizes 0 to 12). Of these, 

no more than 4 are permitted to be NC contacts. 

The magnetic coil is switched directly on and off with the control supply voltage Us by way of terminals A1/A2. 

MULTI-VOLTAGE RANGE FOR THE CONTROL SUPPLY VOLTAGE U S: 

Several closely adjacent control supply voltages, available around the world, are covered by just one coil, for example 

110-115-120-127 V UC or 220-230-240 V UC. In addition, allowance is also made for a coil operating range of 0.8 times 

the lower (Us min) and 1.1 times the upper (Us max) rated control supply voltage within which the contactor switches 

reliably and no thermal overloading occurs.


W LSS, LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW – 


W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS 

Various auxiliary contact blocks can be added to the contactor basic units depending on the application: 

W SIZE 00 

LSSD, LSDD CONTACTORS 

Terminal designations according to EN 50012. 

W SIZES 0 TO 12 

with 1 NO with 1 NC 

LSZDD201,212,213,222 LSZDH540,531,522 

LSZD0501,510 

LSD0 TO LSDG CONTACTORS, 1-POLE AUXILIARY CONTACTS 


LSZ0D010 

LSZ0D910 

(early make) 

contactors 

size 0 to 12 

LSZ0D001 

LSZ0D901 

(delayed) 

Size 00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the basic 

unit. 

Contactors with a NO contact as auxiliary contact with screw or Cage 

Clamp terminals, can be expanded into contactors with 2, 4 and 5 

auxiliary contacts according to EN 50012 using auxiliary contact blocks. 

These auxiliary contact blocks cannot be combined with contactors 

which have a NC contact in the basic unit as they are coded. 

LSZD0501,510 single-auxiliary contact blocks with connection options 

from below enable easy and clearly arranged wiring especially for the 

installation of network access junctions. These auxiliary contact blocks 

are offered only with screw terminals. 

All the previously mentioned auxiliary contact variants can be snapfitted 

onto the front of the contactor. The auxiliary contact block has 

a centrally positioned release lever for disassembly. 

The terminal designations of the single-pole auxiliary contacts 

are comprised of sequence numbers (location identifiers) on 

the contactor (1...4) and of function numbers on the auxiliary 

contacts (.1/.2, .3/.4 or .5/.6, .7/.8). 

The terminal designation of these individual auxiliary contacts 

corresponds to EN 50005 and EN 50012. 

Page 

15

Page 

16 





LSD0 TO LSDG CONTACTORS, 4-POLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS 


W SIZES 0 AND 2 

A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts can be attached; the auxiliary contact blocks used can be of any version. For reasons of 

symmetry, when two 2-pole laterally mountable auxiliary contact blocks are used, one block must be attached on the right 

and one on the left. More auxiliary contacts are permissible with size 2 under certain conditions (please ask). For 4-pole 

contactors see LSR... 


contactors 

size 0 to 12 

LSZ0D131,122,113 LSZ0D140F.,122F.,131F.,104F. 

A maximum of 8 auxiliary contacts can be attached; please note the following: 

Of these 8 auxiliary contacts, there must be no more than 4 NC contacts 

Ensure the symmetry of laterally mounted auxiliary contact blocks 

For 4-pole contactors see LSR... 

The contactors themselves have no integrated auxiliary 

conducting path. 

The auxiliary contact variants are uniform for the 

contactors of size 0 to 12. 

One 4-pole or up to four single-pole auxiliary contact blocks 

(screw or Cage Clamp terminals) can be snapped on. When 

the contactors are switched on, the NC contacts are opened 

first and then the NO contacts are closed. 

If the installation space is limited in depth, 2-pole auxiliary 

contact blocks (screw or Cage Clamp terminals) can be 

attached laterally for use on the left or on the right (LSZ0D711, 

LSZ3D811). 

The auxiliary contact blocks attached to the front can be disassembled 

with the help of a centrally arranged release lever; 

the laterally attached auxiliary contact blocks are easy to 

remove by pressing on the checkered surfaces. 

The laterally attachable auxiliary contact blocks according to 

EN 50012 can be used only when no 4-pole auxiliary contact 

blocks are snapped onto the front. If single-pole auxiliary 

contact blocks are used in addition, the location identifiers on 

the contactor must be noted.


W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS – GENERAL INFORMATIONS 

W CONTACT RELIABILITY 

High contact stability at low voltages and currents, suitable for solid-state circuits with currents ≥ 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V. 

W SURGE SUPPRESSION 

RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combination of a diode and a Zener diode) can be plugged onto all 

auxiliary contactors from the front for damping opening surges in the coil. The plug-in direction is determined by a coding 

device. 

Note: 

The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are damped 

against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms). 

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS 

The LSHD auxiliary contactors can be expanded by up to four contacts by the addition of mountable auxiliary contact blocks. 

The auxiliary contact block can easily be snapped onto the front of the contactors. The auxiliary contact block has a centrally 

positioned release lever for disassembly. All auxiliary contactors with 4 contacts according to EN 50011 can be extended with 

auxiliary contact blocks to obtain auxiliary contactors with 5 or 8 contacts in accordance with EN 50005. 

Aux. contactors, 

EN 50 011, 4 contacts 

4NO; 3NO + 1NC; 

2NO + 2NC 

Aux. contact blocks 

EN 50 005, 

4 or 1 contacts 

LSZDH540,531,522 

LSZD0501,510 

Page 

17

Page 

18 


W LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 00 

LSDD.... LSSD....-PLC 

DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK ORDER NO. 

SIZE 00 – TYPE LSDD 

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO AC24V 50HZ LSDD0710 

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC* AC24V 50HZ LSDD0720 



Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0713 

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC* AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0723 

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LSDD0715 

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC* DC24V LSDD0725 





Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0913 

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NC* AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0923 

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LSDD0915 

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NC* DC24V LSDD0925 

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO AC24V 50HZ LSDD1210 

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* AC24V 50HZ LSDD1220 

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO AC110V 50HZ LSDD1212 

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* AC110V 50HZ LSDD1222 

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD1213 

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD1223 

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LSDD1215 

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* DC24V LSDD1225 

SIZE 00 – TYPE LSSD FOR PLC 

W SCHRACK-INFO 

Auxiliary contact block types LSZD.... can be snapped on contactors 

LSDD.... Contactors for PLC cannot be extended by further 

auxiliary contacts. Suitable surge supressor types LSZD0001 to 

LSZD0004. 

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD071G 

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD072G 

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD091G 

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD092G 

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD121G 

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC 

* Only auxiliary contact block type LSZDH5.. and LSZD05.. possible 

DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD122G



LSD0.... 


SIZE 0 – TYPE LSD0 

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V AC24V 50HZ LSD00930 

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V DC24V LSD00935 


Contactor AC3:4KW/400V AC230V 50/60HZ LSD00933 

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V AC24V 50HZ LSD01230 

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V DC24V LSD01235 


Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V AC230V 50/60HZ LSD01233 










SIZE 0 – TYPE LSS0 FOR PLC 


Auxiliary contact and contact block types LSZ0D... can be snapped on. Suitable surge 

supressor types LSZD0005, LSZD0006 and LSZ00001 to LSZ00003. 

Contactor AC3,5,5KW/400V* DC17-30V LSS0123H 

Contactor AC3:7,5KW/400V* DC17-30V LSS0173H 

Contactor AC3:11KW/400V* DC17-30V LSS0253H 

* Max. 2 pcs. of auxiliary contact type LSZ0D0.. or LSZ0D9.. possible 

Page 

19

Page 

20 

LSD3.... 



LSD2.... 







Auxiliary contact and contact block types LSZ0D... can be snapped on. Suitable surge 

supressor types LSZ20001 for AC 230V. 














Auxiliary contact and contact block types LSZ0D... and LSZ3D... can be snapped on. Suitable 

surge supressor types LSZ20001 for AC 230V. 





Contactor AC3:30KW/400V, 2NO+2NC AC230V 50HZ LSD36553 










Contactor AC3:45KW/400V, 2NO+2NC AC230V 50/60HZ LSD39553

LSD6115F LSD6155F LSDE305F 


W LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 6/10/12 



Contactor AC3:55KW/400V, 2NO+2NC (with box terminals) UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSD6115F 

Contactor AC3:75KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSD6155F 

Contactor AC3:90KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSD6195F 

SIZE 10 – TYPE LSDE 

Contactor AC3:110KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSDE225F 



SIZE 12 – TYPE LSDG 

Contactor AC3:200KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSDG415F 

Contactor AC3:250KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSDG515F 

W LSD VACUUM CONTACTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 14 

LSDH.... 


SIZE 14 – TYPE LSDH 


LSD6115F fitted with box terminals 

up to 70 mm2 , all other types 

without box terminals. Those box 

terminals are deliverable on request. 

Auxiliary contact and contact block 

types LSZ0D... and LSZ3D... can be 

snapped on. Suitable surge supressor 

type LSZ60001. 


Contactors cannot be extended by further auxiliary contacts. Surge supressor by means of a 

varistor circuit is included in the scope of supply. 

Contactor AC3:335KW/400V, 4NO+4NC UC200-240V 50HZ LSDH63G3 




Page 

21

Page 

22 

LSWD.... 


W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2/3 


SIZE 00 – TYPE LSWD 

Reversing Assembly AC3, 3kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSWD0733 

Reversing Assembly AC3, 4kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSWD0933 

Reversing Assembly AC3, 5,5kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSWD1233 

SIZE 0 – TYPE LSW0 

Reversing Assembly AC3, 5,5kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSW01233 


Reversing Assembly AC3, 11kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSW02533 









W LSY WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2 

LSY03233 


SIZE 00 – TYPE LSYD 

WYE-Delta Assembly AC3, up to 7,5kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSYD1733 

SIZE 0 – TYPE LSY0 

WYE-Delta Assembly AC3, up to 15kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSY03233 

SIZE 2 – TYPE LSY2 

LSW0.... 


For higher ratings or customer assembly see components listed 

on pages onwards. 


For higher ratings or customer assembly see components listed on pages onwards. 

WYE-Delta Assembly AC3, up to 22kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSY25033


W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS – 4POLE, SIZE 00/0 

LSR0.... 


SIZE 00 – TYPE LSRD 

Contactor AC1:18A/690V AC24V 50/60HZ LSRD1840 

Contactor AC1:18A/690V DC24V LSRD1845 



Contactor AC1:22A/690V DC24V LSRD2245 


SIZE 0 – TYPE LSR0 

Contactor AC1:35A/690V AC24V 50HZ LSR03540 

Contactor AC1:35A/690V DC24V LSR03545 

Contactor AC1:35A/690V AC230V 50/60HZ LSR03543 




LSR3.... 








Auxiliary contacts, contact blocks and surge supressors are identical to those for contactors 

LSD of same size. 

W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS – 4POLE, SIZE 2/3 


Auxiliary contacts, contact blocks and surge supressors are identical to those for contactors 

LSD of same size. 







Page 

23

Page 

24 

LSKD17B3 


W LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS 

CAPACITOR RATING 400V/INCLUDED AUXILIARY CONTACTS COIL VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK ORDER NO. 

SIZE 00 

12,5 kVAr/1 NO + 1 NC AC230V 50/50Hz LSKD17B3 

SIZE 0 

25 kVAr/1 NO AC230V 50/50Hz LSK03213 

SIZE 3 


Technical data according to IEC 60 947; EN 60 947 (VDE 0660) 

The contactors are suitable for use in any climate 

They are finger-safe according to EN 50274 

W TECHNICAL DATA 

The LSK capacitor contactors are special version of the size 00-3 ALEA contactors. The capacitors are precharged by means of 

the mounted leading NO contacts and resistors; only then do the main contacts close. This prevents disturbances in the network 

and welding of the contactors. Only discharged capacitors are permitted to be switched on with capacitor contactors. 

The auxiliary contact block which is snapped onto the capacitor contactor contains the three leading NO contacts and in the 

case of size 00 one standard NC contact and in the case of size 0 and size 3 one standard NO contact, which is unassigned. 

Size S00 also contains another unassigned NO contact in the basic unit. In addition, a 2-pole auxiliary contact block can be 

mounted laterally on the LSK3 capacitor contactors (1 NO + 1 NC versions) type LSZ0D711. The fitting of auxiliary contacts for 

LSKD and LSK0 is not expandable. 

50 kVAr/1 NO AC230V 50/50Hz LSK36213 

W LA3K CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS 

LA3K181 


For use in detuned or non-detuned capacitor units. 

Technical data according to EN 60 947-4-1; EN 60 947-5-1; VDE 0660 

W TECHNICAL DATA 

Specification: The capacitor switching contactors K3-..K are suitable for switching low-inductive and lowloss capacitors in 

capacitor banks (IEC70 & 831, VDE 0560) with and without reactors. Capacitor switching contactors are fitted with early 

make contacts and damping resistors to reduce the value of the make current to


W AUXILIARY CONTACTS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS LA3K 

LA1901.. 

CAPACITOR RATING 400V/INCLUDED AUXILIARY CONTACTS COIL VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK ORDER NO. 

AUXILIARY CONTACTS FOR CAPACITY SWITCHING CONTACTORS LA3K 

AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K18, 1NC, snap on front 6A/230VAC DIN EN 5005/50012 LA190135 

AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K24...11, 1NO+1NC, side mounted 3A/230VAC DIN EN 5005 LA190134 

AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K…., 1NO, snap on front 3A/230VAC DIN EN 5005/50012 LA190100 

AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K…., 1NC, snap on front 3A/230VAC DIN EN 5005/50012 LA190101 

W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 – 4POLE, SIZE 00 

LSHD.... 


Auxiliary contact types LSZD05.. and LSZDH5.. can be snapped 

on. Contactors for PLC cannot be extended by further auxiliary 

contacts. Suitable surge supressor types LSZD0001 to LSZD0004. 


SIZE 00 – TYPE LSHD 

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO AC24V 50HZ LSHD0670 

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO DC24V LSHD0675 

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSHD0673 

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC24V 50HZ LSHD0680 

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC DC24V LSHD0685 

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC230V 50/60HZ LSHD0683 

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC24V 50HZ LSHD0690 

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC24V LSHD0695 

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC230V 50/60HZ LSHD0693 

SIZE 00 – TYPE LSHD FOR PLC 

LSHD....-PLC 

Contactor, plug with RC, AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD067N 

Contactor with diode assembly, AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD067G 

Contactor*, AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD068N 

Contactor with diode assembly, AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD068G 

Contactor*, AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD069N 

Contactor with diode assembly, AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC 

* Varistors or surge supressor diodes can be plugged in 

DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD069G 

Page 

25

Page 

26 


W AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD OR LSSD, SIZE 00 

LSZDD213 LSZD0510 

DESCRIPTION FREQU/REMARK ORDER NO. 

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0510 

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NC, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0501 

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NC 1) DIN EN 50012 LSZDD201 

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO+2NC 1) DIN EN 50012 LSZDD212 



1) 

Auxiliary contact blocks for use with contactors type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NO included, for contators type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NC included use auxiliary contact blocks type 

LSZDH5.. (see item below) 

W AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD, LSSD OR LSHD, SIZE 00 

LSZDH522 LSZD0510 


Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0510 

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NC, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0501 

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 4NO 2) DIN EN 50005 LSZDH540 

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 3NO+1NC 2) DIN EN 50005 LSZDH531 

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 2NO+2NC 2) DIN EN 50005 LSZDH522 

2) 

Auxiliary contact blocks for use with contactors type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NC included, for contators type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NO included use auxiliary contact blocks type 

LSZDD2.. (see item above) 

W PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINAL, SIZE 00 

LSZDY002 LSZDD003 LSZDD001 

DESCRIPTION ORDER NO. 

PARALLEL CONNECTOR 

Parallel connector, 25mm 2 for size 00, 3pol. + terminal LSZDD003 

Parallel connector, 25mm 2 for size 00, 4pol. + terminal LSZDD004 

Parallel connector, star jumper for size 00, 3pol. (can be shortened by 1 pole) LSZDY002 

FEED TERMINAL 

Feed terminal, 6mm 2 for size 00, 3pol. + 3 terminals LSZDD001

LSZDW002 


W WIRING SETS*, MECHANICAL INTERLOCK AND CONNECTION CLIPS, SIZE 00 


Wiring set for reversing contactor assemblies, size 00* LSZDW001 

Wiring set for WYE-Delta contactor assemblies, size 00 LSZDY001 

Connection clips for two contactors, size 00* LSZDW002 

* Contains two connection clips and one mechanical interlock link 

W WYE-DELTA TIMERS 

LSZD0102 


WYE-Delta timer, 20s (timedelay -20s) 24/240VAC 24 VDC 50/60Hz LSZD0101 

WYE-Delta timer, 60s (timedelay -60s) 24/240VAC 24 VDC 50/60Hz LSZD0102 

W CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES, 

SIZE 00 

LSZDD005 


By using the interlock link, the overall width of the e.g. reversing assembly is not increased 

(0 mm clearance between the contactors). 


Timers have a fixed dead intervall of 50 ms (between Wye- and Delta-state). 

DESCRIPTION 

Connection link for contactor size 00 and 

COIL VOLTAGE ORDER NO. 

motor protection switch, size 00 

Connection link for contactor size 00 and 

AC-DC operated LSZDD005 

motor protection switch, size 0 AC-DC operated LSZDD006 

Page 

27

Page 

28 


W SOLDER PIN ADAPTER, SIZE 00 

LSZDD002 


Solder pin adapter for size 00 LSZDD002 

W SURGE SUPRESSORS (PLUG IN TYPE), SIZE 00 

LSZD0004 

DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE ORDER NO. 

Varistor for size 00 AC24-48V; DC24-70V LSZD0001 

Varistor for size 00 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZD0002 

Surge supressor for size 00 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZD0003 

Surge supressor diode for size 00 DC12-250V LSZD0004 

W AUXILIARY CONTACTS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12 

LSZ0D001 LSZ0D010 


Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NC DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D001 

Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NO DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D010 

Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NC-delayed DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D901 

Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NO-early make DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D910


W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12 

LSZ0D122 


Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 1NO+3NC DIN EN 50012 LSZ0D113 



Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 4NO DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D140F 

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 3NO+1NC DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D131F 

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 2NO+2NC DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D122F 

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 4NC DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D104F 

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SIDE MOUNTED), SIZE 0-12 

LSZ0D711 


Auxiliary Contact, sidemounted for size 0-12, 1NO+1NC, first position DIN EN 50012 LSZ0D711 

Auxiliary Contact, sidemounted for size 3-12, 1NO+1NC, second position DIN EN 50012 LSZ3D811 

W MECHANICAL INTERLOCKS, SIZE 0-12 

LSZ0W002 


Mechanical interlock for contactors size 0-3 (including 2NC auxiliary contacts) LSZ0W002 

Mechanical interlock for contactors size 6-12 LSZ6W001 

Page 

29

Page 

30 


W WIRING SETS FOR REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, SIZE 0-12 


Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 0 LSZ0W001 

Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 2, including connection clips LSZ2W001 

Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 3, including connection clips LSZ3W001 

Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 6 LSZ6W002 

Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 10 LSZEW001 

Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 12 LSZGW001 

W WIRING SETS FOR YD-ASSEMBLIES AND YD-ACCESSORIES, SIZE 0-3 


Wiring set for YD-assemblies, size 0, including mech.interlock and connection clips LSZ0Y001 

Wiring set for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-0 LSZ2Y004 

Wiring set for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-2 LSZ2Y003 

Mountingplate for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-0 LSZ2Y001 

Mountingplate for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-2 LSZ2Y002 

W CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES, 

SIZE 0-3 



Connection link for contactor size 0 and BES0 AC operating assemblies LSZ0D002 

Connection link for contactor size 0 and BES0 DC operating assemblies LSZ0D004 


Connection link for contactor size 2 and BES2 DC operating assemblies LSZ2D005 


Connection link for contactor size 3 and BES3 DC operating assemblies LSZ3D003

LSZ0Y002 LSZ6Y003 


W PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINALS, SIZE 0-12 



PARALLEL CONNECTOR 

Parallel connector, 35mm 2 for size 0, 3pol. + terminal LSZ0D003 

Parallel connector, star jumper for size 0, 3pol.* LSZ0Y002 

Parallel connector; 95mm 2 for size 2, 3pol.+terminal LSZ2D003 



Parallel connector, star jumper for size 6, 3pol. (with bore diameter 10,5mm) LSZ6Y003 

Parallel connector, star jumper for size 10, 12, 3pol. (with bore diameter 12,5mm) LSZEY003 

FEED TERMINALS 

W SURGE SUPRESSORS, SIZE 0-12 

LSZ00002 

LSZ2D003 

BEZ00116 

Star jumper size 0-3 can be reduced by 1 pole*. For touch-protection of parallel connectors size 6 use LSZ6D002, for size 

10 and size 12 use LSZED002. 

Feed terminal, 25mm 2 for size 0, 3pol. + 3 terminals BEZ00116 

Feed terminal, 50mm 2 for size 2, 3pol. + 3 terminals BEZ00216 

Feed terminal, 95mm 2 for size 3, 1pol. + terminal LSZ3D001 


Up to size 3, these devices can be snapped in either at the top (assemblies with overload 

relays) or at the bottom (assemblies with MPS) of the contactor. Sizes 6-12: snapping in is 

only possible at the top of contactor. 


Surge supressor, diode assembly for size 0, top mounted DC24V LSZD0005 

Surge supressor, diode assembly for size 0, bottom mounted DC24V (marked with “+” and “–“) LSZD0006 

Varistor for size 0 AC24-48V; DC24-70V LSZ00001 

Varistor for size 0 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ00002 

Surge supressor, RC for size 0 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ00003 

Surge supressor, RC for size 2-3 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ20001 

Surge supressor, RC for size 6-12 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ60001 

Page 

31

Page 

32 


W CONNECTION CLIPS FOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0-3 

LSZ2W003 LSZ2D001 


Connection clip, for contactors 3/4pole, size 0 to 0 (contactors without interlock) LSZ0W003 

Connection clip, for contactors 3/4pole, size 0 to 0 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ0W004 

Connection clip, for contactors 4pole, size 2 to 2 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ2W002 

Connection clip, for contactors 4pole, size 3 to 3 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ3W002 

Connection clip, for contactors 3pole, size 2/3/6 to 2/3/6 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ2W003 

Connection clip, for contactors 3/4pole, size 2/3 (contactors without interlock) LSZ2D001 

W MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK, SIZE 0-2 

LSZ00113 


Mechanical latching block for size 0-2, remains "ON" if voltage fails 24VACDC LSZ00113 

W TERMINAL COVERS, SIZE 2-14 




Terminal Cover for size 2* (additional cover, to be fitted on the box terminals) LSZ2D002 

Terminal Cover for size 3* (additional cover, to be fitted on the box terminals) LSZ3D002 

Terminal Cover for size 6* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection (38 mm) LSZ6D001 

Terminal Cover - short version for size 6* for contactor assemblies (100 mm) LSZ6D002 

Terminal Cover for size 10*/12* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection (120 mm) LSZED001 

Terminal Cover - short version for size 10*/12* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection (42 mm) LSZED002 

Terminal Cover for size 14* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection LSZHD001 

* Order 2 pcs. for one complete contactor, order 1 pc. just for one side (up side or bottom side) of contactor 

2 pieces of clips are necessary for 1 contactor-assembly 

(2 contactors). 


Contactors fitted with this latching block will remain “ON” in case of control-voltage failure 

until the latching block is resetted by a 24 VAC DC impuls. 


Additional covers for contactors with box terminals size 6-12 

on request.

W LSS, LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW 

Contactor Type LSS, LSD 

Rated data of the auxiliary contacts 

Size 00 ... 12 

Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1/EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200) 

The data apply to integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the auxiliary 

contact blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S121) Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 690 

For LSZ..... laterally mountable auxiliary contact blocks V max. 500 

Continuous thermal current Ith = 

Rated operational current Ie/AC-12 AC load 

Rated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14 A 10 

for rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 6 

110 V A 6 

125 V A 6 

220 V A 6 

230 V A 6 

380 V A 3 

400 V A 3 

500 V A 2 

660 V2) A 1 

690 V2) DC load 

Rated operational current Ie/DC-12 A 1 

for rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 10 

60 V A 6 

110 V A 3 

125 V A 2 

220 V A 1 

440 V A 0.3 

600 V2) Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 A 0.15 

for rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 101) 60 V A 2 

110 V A 1 

125 V A 0.9 

220 V A 0.3 

440 V A 0,14 

600 V2) A 0,1 

Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA Frequency of contact faults < 10-8 acc. to EN 60947-5-4 

Endurance of the auxiliary contacts 

i.e.

Page 

34 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 


Endurance of the main contacts 

The characteristic curves show the contact endurance of the contactors when switching 

resistive and inductive AC loads (AC-1/AC-3) depending on the breaking current and 

rated operational voltage. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched 

randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system. 

The rated operational current Ie complies with utilization category AC-4 (breaking six times 

the rated operational current) and is intended for a contact endurance of at least 200 000 

operating cycles. 

If a shorter endurance is sufficient, the rated operational current I e/AC-4 can be increased. 

If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i.e. normal switching (breaking the rated 

operational current according to utilization category AC-3) in combination with intermittent 

inching (breaking several times the rated operational current according to utilization 

category AC-4), the contact endurance can be calculated approximately from the following 

equation: 

Characters in the equation: 

X Contact endurance for mixed operation in operating cycles 

A Contact endurance for normal operation (I a = I e) in operating cycles 

B Contact endurance for inching (I a = multiple of I e) in operating cycles 

C Inching operations as a percentage of total switching operations 

Diagram legend: 

P N = Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V 

I a = Breaking current 

I e = Rated operational current 

Size 00 

Size 0 

Contactor type LSSD07, 

LSDD07 

3 kW 

Contactor type – 

LSD009 

LSS012 

LSD012 

Contactor type LSSD09, LSSD12, 

LSDD09, LSDD12 

4 kW 5,5 kW 

LSS017 

LSD017 

LSS025 

LSD025

W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW 

Endurance of the main contacts 

Size 2 

Sizes 6–12 

Contactor type LSD232 LSD240 LSD250 

Contactor LSD611 

type 

Diagram legend: 




LSD615 LSD619 LSDE22 LSDE26 LSDE30 LSDG41 LSDG51 

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 

The contactors with solid-state operating mechanism comply with the requirements for operation in industrial installations. 

Interference immunity 

- Burst (IEC 61000-4-4): 4 kW 

- Surge (IEC 61000-4-5): 4 kW 

- Electrostatic discharge, ESD (IEC 61000-4-2): 8/15 kW 

- Electromagnetic field (IEC 61000-4-3): 10 V/m 

Emitted interference 

- Limited value class A according to EN 55011 

Note: In connection with converters, the control cables should be installed seperatly from the load cables to the converter. 


Size 3 

Contactor type LSD365 LSD380 LSD395 

Page 

35



Contactor Type LSSD, LSDD 

Page 

Size 00 

36 

General data 

Permissible mounting position 

The contactors are designed for 

operation on a vertical mounting surface. 

AC and DC operation 

! $ 

# # 

Upright mounting position: AC operation 

DC operation 

Special version required. 

Standard version 

Mechanical endurance Basic unit Operating 

cycles 

30 million 

Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary 

contact block 

10 million 

Solid-state compatible auxiliary 

contact block 

5 million 

Electrical endurance 

1) 

Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 690 

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 

Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts 

acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N 

V 400 

Ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60 

During storage °C -55 ... +80 

Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20, coil assembly IP40 

Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe 

Shock resistance rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10 

DC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10 

Shock resistance sine pulse AC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10 

DC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10 

Conductor cross-sections 

2) 

Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relays 

For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see 

Protection Equipment: Overload Relays 

For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see Load Feeders, 

Motor Starters and Soft Starters: -> 3RA Fuseless Load Feeders. 

Main circuit 

Fuse links gL/gG LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED 

- Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 35 

EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 20 

Weld-free 3) A 10 

Miniature circuit breakers (up to 230 V) with C characteristic 

Short-circuit current 1 kA, type of coordination "1" 

Auxiliary circuit 

A 10 

Fuse links gL/gG 

DIAZED, NEOZED (weld-free protection Ik ≥ 1 kA) 

A 10 

Miniature circuit breakers up to 230 V with C characteristic 

Short-circuit current Ik < 400 A 

A 6 

1) See first two pages of chapter Technical Specifications “Endurance of the main contacts”. 

2) See “Conductor cross-sections” pages onward. 

3) Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.


Contactor Type LSSD, LSDD 

Control 

Magnetic coil operating range 

Size 00 

AC operation 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us 60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us DC operation up to 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us up to 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us Power consumption of the magnetic coils coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us) AC operation, 50/60 Hz 

Standard version Closing VA 27/24.3 

P.f. 0.8/0.75 

Closed VA 4.4/3.4 

P.f. 0.27/0.27 

AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada Closing VA 26.4 

P.f. for closing 0.81 

Closed VA 4.7 

P.f. for closed 0.26 

AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada Closing VA 31.7 

P.f. for closing 0.77 

Closed VA 5.1 

P.f. for closed 0.27 

DC operation Closing = Closed W 3.3 

Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal) 

AC operation < 3 mA x (230 V/Us) DC operation 

Operating times 

< 10 mA x (24 V/Us) 1) 

Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time 

AC operation Closing delay ms 8 ... 35 

at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us Opening delay ms 4 ... 30 

DC operation Closing delay ms 25 ... 100 

at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 

Arcing time 

Operating times for 1.0 x U 1) 

s 

ms 10 ... 15 


Opening delay ms 5 ... 30 



1) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor 

coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times,varistor +2 to 5 ms). 


Contactor Type LSSD07, LSDD07 LSSD09, LSDD09 LSSD12, LSDD12 

Main circuit 

AC capacity 

Utilization category AC-1 

Switching resistive loads 

Size 00 00 00 

Rated operational current Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 18 22 22 

at 60 °C up to 690 V A 16 20 20 

Rated power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 6.3 7.5 7.5 

P.f.= 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 11 13 13 

500 V kW 13.8 17 17 

690 V kW 19 22 22 

Minimum conductor cross-section at 40 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 2.5 

for loads with Ie Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3 

at 60 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 2.5 

Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 7 9 12 

440 V A 7 9 11 

500 V A 5 6.5 9 

690 V A 4 5.2 6.3 

Rated power for slipring or squirrelcage at 230 V kW 2.2 3 3 

motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 3 4 5.5 

500 V kW 3.5 4.5 5.5 

690 V kW 4 5.5 5.5 

Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 56 72 96 

1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. (increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into account). 

2) According to IEC 60947-4-1. For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays. 

Page 

37

Page 

38 




Main circuit 

AC capacity 

Size 00 00 00 

Power loss per conducting path 

Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie) at Ie/AC-3 W 0.42 0.7 1.24 

Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 6.5 8.5 8.5 

Rated power for squirrel-cage motors 

with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 

The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200000 

operating cycles: 

up to 400 V kW 3 4 4 

- rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 2.6 4.1 4.1 

690 V A 1.8 3.3 3.3 

- rated power for squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 0.67 1.1 1.1 

motors 400 V kW 1.15 2 2 

with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 500 V kW 1.45 2 2 

Utilization category AC-5a 

Switching gas discharge lamps, inductive ballast 

Per main current path at 230 V 

Uncorrected, 

690 V kW 1.15 2.5 2.5 

rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/0.37 A Units 54 59 59 

L 36 W/0.43 A Units 46 51 51 

L 58 W/0.67 A Units 29 32 32 

L 80 W/0.79 A Units 25 27 27 

DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.22 A Units 90 ( 2 x 90 lamps) 100 ( 2 x 100 lamps) 100 ( 2 x 100 lamps) 

L 36 W/0.42 A Units 47 ( 2 x 47 lamps) 52 ( 2 x 52 lamps) 52 ( 2 x 52 lamps) 


Switching gas discharge lamps with correction 


Shunt compensation with inductive ballast, 

rated power per lamp/capacitance/ 


rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A Units 17 22 22 

L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A Units 16 22 22 

L 58 W/7.0 µF/0.32 A Units 10 14 14 

With solid-state ballast 

L 80 W/7.0 µF/0.49 A Units 6 9 9 

1) single lamp 

L 18 W/6.8 µF/0.10 A Units 49 63 63 

L 36 W/6.8 µF/0.18 A Units 27 35 35 

L 58 W/10 µF/0.29 A Units 16 23 23 

With solid-state ballast 

L 80 W/10 µF/0.43 A Units 11 14 14 

1) two-lamp 

L 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A Units 27 ( 2 x 27 lamps) 35 ( 2 x 35 lamps) 35 ( 2 x 35 lamps) 




Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps 

Per main current path at 230/220 V 


switching AC transformers 

Rated operational current Ie kW 1.3 1.7 1.7 

For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 3.6 5.1 7.2 

For inrush current n = 30 

Rated power P 

up to 400 V A 2.4 3.3 5.1 

For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 1.4 2 2.9 

400 V kVA 2.5 3.5 5 

500 V kVA 3.3 4.6 6.2 

690 V kVA 4.3 6 8.6 

For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 1 1.3 2 

400 V kVA 1.6 2.3 3.5 

500 V kVA 2.2 3.1 4.6 

690 V kVA 2.9 4 6 

For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows: 

Px = Pn30· 30/x 

1) Depending on the electronic ballast used, higher lamp numbers are also possible.




Main circuit 

DC capacity 

Utilization category DC-1 

Switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms) 

Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C) 

Size 00 00 00 

1 conducting path up to 24 V A 15 20 

60 V A 15 20 

110 V A 1.5 2.1 

220 V A 0.6 0.8 

440 V A 0.42 0.6 

600 V A 0.42 0.6 

2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 15 20 

60 V A 15 20 

110 V A 8.4 12 

220 V A 1.2 1.6 

440 V A 1.6 0.8 

600 V A 0.5 0.7 


60 V A 15 20 

110 V A 15 20 

220 V A 15 20 

440 V A 0.9 1.3 

Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5 

Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms) 


600 V A 0.7 1 


60 V A 0.35 0.5 

110 V A 0.1 0.15 

220 V A – – 

440 V A – – 

600 V A – – 


60 V A 3.5 5 

110 V A 0.25 0.35 

220 V A – – 

440 V A – – 

600 V A – – 


60 V A 15 20 

110 V A 15 20 

220 V A 1.2 1.5 

440 V A 0.14 0.2 

Switching frequency 

Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour 

600 V A 0.14 0.2 

Contactors without overload relay No-load switching frequency AC h-1 10000 

No-load switching frequency DC h-1 10000 

Dependence of the switching Rated operation 

frequency z’ on the operational current AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 

I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 750 

z’ = z . (I e/I’) . (400 V/U’) 1.5 . 1/h AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 750 

AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 250 

Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 Conductor cross-sections 

15 

Screw terminals Main and auxiliary conductors: Screw terminals 

(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 1) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (1 ... 4) 

For standard screwdriver size 2 and Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 1) 

Pozidriv 2 Solid or stranded, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 1); 2 x (18 ... 14) 1); 

AWG cables 

1 x 12 

Terminal screw M3 

- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in) 

Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Main and auxiliary conductors; Cage Clamp terminals 

(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) coil connections: 

Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) 

Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) 

Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) 

AWG cables, 

solid or stranded 

AWG 2 x (24 ... 14) 

1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not 

apply. 

Page 

39

Page 

40 



Contactor Type – LSS012 LSS017 LSS025 

LSD009 LSD012 LSD017 LSD025 

General data 


Size 0 0 0 0 


operation on a vertical mounting 

surface. 


! $ 

# # 

Upright mounting position: AC operation 

Standard version 

DC operation Special version required 

Mechanical endurance Basic unit Operating 

cycles 

10 million 

Basic unit with snap-on 

auxiliary contact block 

10 million 


1) 




(acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N) 

Mirror contacts 

V 400 

A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC LSD0...., LSS0.... Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F 

contact that cannot be closed 

simultaneously with a NO main contact. 

(removable auxiliary contact block) 

LSD0...., LSS0.... 

(permanent auxiliary contact block) 

Acc. to SUVA requirements on request 

Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60 




Shock resistance rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 8.2/5 and 4.9/10 

DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 7.5/10 

Shock resistance sine pulse AC operation g/ms 12.5/5 and 7.8/10 

DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 10/10 


2) 


Main circuit For short-circuit protection for contactors with thermal overload relays see Protection 

Fuse links gL/gG Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays 

LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see Load Feeders 

- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 25 35 

EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" 

Weld-free3) A 10 16 

Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic 

(short-circuit current 3 kA, type of coordination "1") 


A 25 32 


DIAZED, NEOZED 

(weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA) 

A 10 

Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic 

(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A) 

A 10 





Contactor Type LSS0, LSD0 

Control 

Size 0 

Magnetic coil operating range AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us Power consumption of the magnetic coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us) AC operation, 50 Hz, Closing VA 61 

standard version P.f. 0.82 

Closed VA 7.8 

P.f. 0.24 

AC operation, 50/60 Hz, Closing VA 64/63 

standard version P.f. 0.72/0.74 

Closed VA 8.4/6.8 

P.f. 0.24/0.28 

AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada Closing VA 61 

P.f. 0.82 

Closed VA 7.8 

P.f. 0.24 

AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada Closing VA 69 

P.f. 0.76 

Closed VA 7.5 

P.f. 0.28 

DC operation Closing = Closed W 5.4 


AC operation mA < 6 mA x (230 V/Us) 

DC operation 

Operating times for 0.8 ... 1.1 x U 1) 

s 


mA < 16 mA x (24 V/Us) 




Opening delay ms 13.5 ... 15.5 

Arcing time 


s 

ms 10 




Opening delay ms 14 ... 15.5 


1) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are 

increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks 

(varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: 2 to 6 times). 



Main circuit 

AC capacity 



Size 0 0 0 0 

Rated operational current Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 40 

at 60 °C up to 690 V A 35 

Rated power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 13.3 

P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 23 

500 V kW 29 

690 V kW 40 

Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm² 10 

loads with Ie Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 

at 60 °C mm² 10 

Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25 

440 V A 9 12 17 22 

500 V A 6.5 12 17 18 

690 V A 5.2 9 13 13 

Rated power for slipring or squirrelcage at 110 V kW 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 

motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5 

400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 

500 V kW 4.5 7.5 10 11 

660 V / 690 V kW 5.5 7.5 11 11 

Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 80 110 150 200 

Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 0.4 0.5 0.9 1.6 



Page 

41

Page 

42 





Main circuit 

AC capacity 

Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie) Size 0 0 0 0 

Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 8.5 12.5 15.5 15.5 

Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with 

50 Hz and 60 Hz 

at 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 7.5 

The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200000 operating cycles: 

Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 4.1 5.5 7.7 9 

690 V A 3.3 5.5 7.7 9 

Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with at 110 V kW 0.5 0.73 1 1.2 

50 Hz and 60 Hz 230 V kW 1.1 1.5 2 2.5 

400 V kW 2 2.6 3.5 4.4 

500 V kW 2 3.3 4.6 5.6 




690 V kW 2.5 4.6 6 7.7 

1) 

Rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp 

Uncorrected L 18 W/0.37 A Units 108 

L 36 W/0.43 A Units 93 

L 58 W/0.67 A Units 59 

L 80 W/0.79 A Units 50 

DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.22 A Units 181 ( 2 x 181 lamps) 

L 36 W/0.42 A Units 95 ( 2 x 95 lamps) 





Rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp 

Shunt compensation with inductive ballast L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A Units 37 41 61 

L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A Units 30 30 51 

L 58 W/7.0 µF/0.32 A Units 20 20 33 

L 80 W/7.0 µF/0.49 A Units 13 13 22 

With solid-state ballast2) single lamp L 18 W/6.8 µF/0.10 A Units 105 119 175 

L 36 W/6.8 µF/0.18 A Units 58 66 97 

L 58 W/10 µF/0.29 A Units 36 41 60 

L 80 W/10 µF/0.43 A Units 24 27 40 

With solid-state ballast2) two-lamp L 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A Units 58 ( 2 x 58 lamps) 66 ( 2 x 66 l.) 97 ( 2 x 97 l.) 

L 36 W/10 µF/0.35 A Units 30 ( 2 x 30 lamps) 34 ( 2 x 34 l.) 50 ( 2 x 50 l.) 



Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps 





For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 11.4 20.2 


Rating P 

up to 400 V A 7.6 13.5 

For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 4.5 8 

400 V kVA 7.9 13.9 

500 V kVA 9.9 15.5 

690 V kVA 13.6 15.5 

For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 3 5.4 

400 V kVA 5.2 9.3 

500 V kVA 6.6 11.7 

690 V kVA 9.1 15.5 


Px = P . 

n30 30/x 

Utilization category AC-6b, 

switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors 

Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 5.8 10.8 

Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 2.5 4 

banks of capacitors (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 4 7.5 

of 6 µH between capacitors connected in 500 V kvar 4 7.5 

parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 4 7.5 

1) For Ie/AC-1 = 35 A (60 °C) and the corresponding minimum conductor cross-section 10 mm 2 . 






Main circuit 

DC capacity 


Switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1ms) 


Size 0 0 0 0 

1 conducting path up to 24 V A 35 

60 V A 20 

110 V A 4.5 

220 V A 1 

440 V A 0.4 

600 V A 0.25 

2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 35 

60 V A 35 

110 V A 35 

220 V A 5 

440 V A 1 

600 V A 0.8 


60 V A 35 

110 V A 35 

220 V A 35 

440 V A 2.9 




600 V A 1.4 


60 V A 5 

110 V A 2.5 

220 V A 1 

440 V A 0.09 

600 V A 0.06 


60 V A 35 

110 V A 15 

220 V A 3 

440 V A 0.27 

600 V A 0.16 


60 V A 35 

110 V A 35 

220 V A 10 

440 V A 0.6 



600 V A 0.6 

Contactors without overload relays No-load switching h-1 frequency AC 

5000 

Dependence of the switching frequency z’ No-load switching h-1 1500 

on the operational current I’ and operational 

voltage U’: 

frequency DC 

z’ = z . (Ie/I’) . (400 V/U’) 1.5 . 1/h AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 

AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 750 

AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 750 

AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 300 250 

Contactors with Thermal overload relays (mean value) h-1 15 

Page 

43

Page 

44 






Size 0 0 0 0 

Screw terminals Main conductors Screw terminals 

(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Conductor cross-section 

Solid mm² 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 1); 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 1) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 1 x 10 

Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 1); 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 1) 

AWG cables, solid AWG 2 x (16 ... 12) 

AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (14 ... 10) 

AWG cables, stranded AWG 1 x 8 

Terminal screws M4 (Pozidriv size 2) 

- tightening torque 

Auxiliary conductors 

Conductor cross-section 

Nm 2 ... 2.5 (18 ... 22 lb.in) 

Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 1) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4) 

Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 1) 

Solid or stranded AWG (2 x) AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 1); 2 x (18 ... 14) 1); 1 x 12 

Terminal screws M3 


Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors Cage Clamp terminals 

(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) 




1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, 

both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used, 

this restriction does not apply. 

Contactor Type LSD232 LSD240 LSD250 

General data 

Size 2 2 2 




surface. 


! $ 

# # 

For DC operation and 22.5 ° inclination towards the front, 

operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us Upright mounting position: AC operation 

DC operation 


– 

Mechanical endurance Basic units Operating 

cycles 

10 million 


contact block 

10 million 


2) 





V 400 



Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 (terminal compartment IP00), 

AC coil assembly IP40, 

DC coil assembly IP30 

Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 

Shock resistance 

finger-safe 

Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10 

Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10 


3) 


3) See “Conductor cross-sections” pages onward.




Size 2 2 2 


For short-circuit protection for contactors with thermal overload relays see 

protection equipment: Thermal overload relays 

For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see 

protection equipment: Motor protection switches 

Main circuit 

Fuse links, gL/gG 

LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED 

Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 125 125 160 

EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 63 63 80 

Weld-free1) Auxiliary circuit 

A 16 16 50 

Fuse links gL/gG A 10 

DIAZED, NEOZED (weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA) 

Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (short-circuit current Ik ≤ 400 A) 

Control 

A 10 

Magnetic coil operating range AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us Power consumption of the magnetic coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us) AC operation, 50 Hz, standard version Closing VA 104 145 

P.f. 0.78 0.79 

Closed VA 9.7 12.5 

P.f. 0.42 0.36 

AC operation, 50/60 Hz, standard version Closing VA 127/113 170/155 

P.f. 0.73/0.69 0.76/0.72 

Closed VA 11.3/9.5 15/11.8 

P.f. 0.41/0.42 0.35/0.38 

AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada Closing VA 108 150 

P.f. 0.76 0.77 


P.f. 0.42 0.35 


P.f. 0.7 0.71 


P.f. 0.42 0.37 

DC operation Closing = Closed W 13.3 13.3 


AC operation mA

Page 

46 




Main circuit 

AC capacity 



Size 2 2 2 

Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 50 60 60 

at 60 °C up to 690 V A 45 55 55 

Rated power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 18 22 22 

P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 31 38 38 

500 V kW 39 46 46 

690 V kW 54 66 66 

Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm² 16 16 16 

loads with Ie Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 

at 60 °C mm² 10 16 16 


690 V A 20 24 24 

Rated power for slipring 230 V kW 7.5 11 15 

or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 15 18.5 22 

at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kW 18.5 22 30 

690 V kW 18.5 22 22 


Power loss per conducting path 

Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie) at Ie/AC-3 W 1.8 2.6 5 

Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 29 35 41 



at 400 V kW 15 18.5 22 


Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 15.6 18.5 24 

690 V A 15.6 18.5 24 

Rated power for squirrel-cage motors 230 V kW 4.7 5.4 7.3 

with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 8.2 9.5 12.6 

500 V kW 9.8 11.8 15.8 




Uncorrected, 

690 V kW 13 15.5 21.8 

rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/0.37 A Units 135 162 162 

L 36 W/0.43 A Units 116 139 139 

L 58 W/0.67 A Units 74 89 89 

L 80 W/0.79 A Units 63 75 75 

DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.22 A Units 227 ( 2 x 227 lamps) 272 ( 2 x 272 lamps) 272 ( 2 x 272 lamps) 







rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp 

L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A Units 78 98 123 

L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A Units 78 98 123 

L 58 W/7 µF/0.32 A Units 50 63 79 

L 80 W/7 µF/0.49 A Units 50 63 73 


L 36 W/6.8 µF/0.18 A Units 124 155 194 

L 58 W/10 µF/0.29 A Units 77 96 120 

L 80 W/10 µF/0.43 A Units 52 65 81 

With solid-state ballast3) two-lamp L 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A Units 124 ( 2 x 124 lamps) 155 ( 2 x 155 lamps) 194 ( 2 x 194 lamps) 










Main circuit 

AC capacity 

Size 2 2 2 

Utilization category AC-5b 

Switching incandescent lamps 





For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 31 36.5 43.2 


Rating P 

up to 400 V A 20.7 24.3 28.8 

For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 12.3 14.5 17.2 

400 V kVA 21.5 25.3 29.9 

500 V kVA 26.8 31.6 37.4 

690 V kVA 23.9 28.7 28.7 

For inrush current n = 30 230 V kVA 8.2 9.7 11.5 

400 V kVA 14.3 16.8 20 

500 V kVA 17.9 21 24.9 

690 V kVA 23.9 28.7 28.7 

For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows. 

Px = P . 

n30 30/x 


Switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors 

Ambient temperature 40 °C 


Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 12 15 15 

banks of capacitors (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 20 25 25 

of 20 µH between capacitors connected 525 V kvar 25 33 33 

in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 

DC capacity 


Switching resistive loads (L/R < 1ms) 


690 V kvar 20 25 25 

1 conducting path up to 24 V A 45 55 55 

60 V A 20 23 23 

110 V A 4.5 4.5 4.5 

220 V A 1 1 1 

440 V A 0.4 0.4 0.4 

600 V A 0.25 0.25 0.25 

2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 45 55 55 

60 V A 45 45 45 

110 V A 25 25 25 

220 V A 5 5 5 

440 V A 1 1 1 

600 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8 


60 V A 45 55 55 

110 V A 45 55 55 

220 V A 45 45 45 

440 V A 2.9 2.9 2.9 


Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15ms) 


600 V A 1.4 1.4 1.4 


60 V A 6 6 6 

110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5 

220 V A 1 1 1 

440 V A 0.1 0.1 0.1 

600 V A 0.06 0.06 0.06 


60 V A 45 45 45 

110 V A 25 25 25 

220 V A 5 5 5 

440 V A 0.27 0.27 0.27 

600 V A 0.16 0.16 0.16 


60 V A 45 55 55 

110 V A 45 55 55 

220 V A 25 25 25 

440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.6 

600 V A 0.35 0.35 0.35 

Page 

47

Page 

48 





Size 2 2 2 


Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC h-1 5000 5000 5000 

No-load switching frequency DC h-1 1500 1500 1500 

Dependence of the switching frequency AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1200 1200 1000 

z’ on the operational current I’ AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 750 600 400 

and operational voltage U’: AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 1000 800 

z’ = z . (Ie/I’) . (400 V/U’) 1.5 . 1/h AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 250 300 300 

Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 15 15 15 

Contactor Type LSD2.. 

Size 2 


Screw terminals Main conductors: Screw terminals 

(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) with box terminal 

Front clamping point Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25 

connected Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25 

Stranded mm² 0.75 ... 35 

Solid mm² 0.75 ... 16 

Ribbon cable conductors mm 6 x 9 x 0.8 

(number x width x thickness) 

AWG cables, AWG 18 ... 2 


Rear clamping point Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25 

connected Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25 


Solid mm² 0.75 ... 16 



AWG cables, AWG 18 ... 2 


Both clamping points Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 

connected Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 

Stranded mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 25) 

Solid mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 

Ribbon cable conductors 


mm 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 

AWG cables, 


AWG 2 x (18 ... 2) 

Terminal screw M6 (Pozidriv size 2) 


Auxiliary conductors: 

Nm 3 ... 4.5 (27 ... 40 lb.in) 

Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 1) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4) 


AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 1); 2 x (18 ... 14) 1); 1 x 12 



Cage Clamp terminals (on request) 

(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) 

Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals 

Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) 



AWG cables, 


2 x (24 ... 14) 

1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used, this restriction does not 

apply.




General data 

Size 3 3 3 




surface. 


! $ 

# # 

For DC operation and 22.5 ° inclination towards the front, 

operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us Upright mounting position: AC operation 

DC operation 


– 


cycles 

10 million 


contact block 

10 million 


1) 





V 690 



Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 (terminal compartment IP00), 

AC coil assembly IP40, 

DC coil assembly IP30 



finger-safe 

Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10 

Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10 


2) 


For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see 


For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see load feeders 

Main circuit 




EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 125 160 


A 63 100 

Fuse links gL/gG A 10 

DIAZED, NEOZED (weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA) 

Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (short-circuit current I k < 400 A) A 10 



3) Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1. 

Page 

49

Page 

50 




Control 

Size 3 3 3 

Magnetic coil operating range AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us Power consumption of the magnetic coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us) AC operation, 50 Hz, Closing VA 218 270 

standard version P.f. 0.61 0.68 

Closed VA 21 22 

P.f. 0.26 0.27 

AC operation, 50/60 Hz, Closing VA 247/211 298/274 

standard version P.f. 0.62/0.57 0.7/0.62 

Closed VA 25/18 27/20 

P.f. 0.27/0.3 0.29/0.31 


P.f. 0.61 0.68 


P.f. 0.26 0.27 


P.f. 0.55 0.52 


P.f. 0.28 0.29 

DC operation Closing = Closed W 15 15 


AC operation < 25 mA x (230 V/Us) DC operation 

Operating times for 0.8 ... 1.1 x U 1) 

s 


< 43 mA x (24 V/Us) AC operation Closing delay ms 16 ... 57 17 ... 90 

Opening delay ms 10 ... 19 10 ... 25 

DC operation Closing delay ms 90 ... 230 90 ... 230 


Arcing time 


s 

ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 

AC operation Closing delay ms 18 ... 34 18 ... 30 


DC operation Closing delay ms 100 ... 120 100 ... 120 

Main circuit 

AC capacity 





1000 V A 50 60 70 

at 60 °C up to 690 V A 90 100 100 

1000 V A 40 50 60 

Rated output of AC loads2) at 230 V kW 34 38 38 

P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 59 66 66 

500 V kW 74 82 82 

690 V kW 102 114 114 

1000 V kW 66 82 98 

Minimum conductor cross-section for At 40 °C mm² 35 50 50 

loads with IIe Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3 

At 60 °C mm² 35 35 35 


690 V A 47 58 58 

1000 V A 25 30 30 

Rated power for slipring at 230 V kW 18.5 22 22 

or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 30 37 45 

at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kW 37 45 55 

690 V kW 45 55 55 

1000 V kW 30 37 37 


Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 4.6 7.7 10.8 

1) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: 

2 to 6 times). 


3) According to IEC 60947-4-1. For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays.




Main circuit 

AC capacity 

Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie) Size 3 3 3 




at 400 V kW 30 37 45 


- rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 28 34 42 

690 V A 28 34 42 

1000 V A 20 23 23 

- rated power for squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 8.7 10.4 12 

motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 15.1 17.9 22 

500 V kW 18.4 22.4 27 

690 V kW 25.4 30.9 38 




Uncorrected, 

1000 V A 22 30 30 

rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/0.37 A Units 270 324 

L 36 W/0.43 A Units 232 279 

L 58 W/0.67 A Units 149 179 

L 80 W/0.79 A Units 126 151 

DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.21 A Units 454 ( 2 x 454 lamps) 545 ( 2 x 545 lamps) 

L 36 W/0.42 A Units 238 ( 2 x 238 lamps) 285 ( 2 x 285 lamps) 






rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp 

L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A Units 160 197 234 

L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A Units 160 197 234 

L 58 W/7 µF/0.32 A Units 103 127 150 

L 80 W/7 µF/0.49 A Units 103 126 146 


L 36 W/6.8 µF/0.18 A Units 253 311 369 

L 58 W/10 µF/0.29 A Units 156 193 229 

L 80 W/10 µF/0.43 A Units 105 130 154 

With solid-state ballast1) two-lamp L 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A Units 253 ( 2 x 253 lamps) 311 ( 2 x 311 lamps) 369 ( 2 x 369 lamps) 




Switching incandescent lamps 


Per main current path at 230/220 V kW 12.3 15.2 18.1 

1) Depending on the electronic ballast used, higher lamp numbers are also possible. 

Page 

51

Page 

52 




Main circuit 

AC capacity 



Rated operational current Ie (60 °C) 

Size 3 3 3 

For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 63.5 80 84.4 

up to 690 V A 47 58 58 

For inrush current n = 30 up to 400 V A 42.3 56.3 56.3 

Rating P 

up to 690 V A 42.3 56.3 56.3 

For inrush current n = 20 230 V kVA 25.3 31.9 33.6 

400 V kVA 43.9 55.4 58 

500 V kVA 54.9 69.3 73.1 

690 V kVA 56.2 69.3 69.3 

For inrush current n = 30 230 V kV 16.8 22.4 22.4 

400 V kVA 29.3 39 39 

500 V kVA 36.6 48.7 48.7 

690 V kVA 50.3 67.3 67.3 

For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows. 

Px = P . 

n30 30/x 



Rated operational currents Ie (60 °C) up to 400 V A 57 72 

Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 24 29 

banks of capacitors (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 40 50 

of 6 µH between capacitors connected 525 V kvar 50 65 

in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 

DC capacity 


Switching resistive load (L/R ≤ 1 ms) 


690 V kvar 40 50 


60 V A 23 60 60 

110 V A 4.5 9 9 

220 V A 1 2 2 

440 V A 0.4 0.6 0.6 

600 V A 0.26 0.4 0.4 


60 V A 90 100 100 

110 V A 90 100 100 

220 V A 5 10 10 

440 V A 1 1.8 1.8 

600 V A 0.8 1 1 


60 V A 90 100 100 

110 V A 90 100 100 

220 V A 70 80 80 

440 V A 2.9 1.8 4.5 




600 V A 1.4 1 2.6 


60 V A 6 6.5 6.5 

110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5 

220 V A 1 1 1 

440 V A 0.15 0.15 0.15 

600 V A 0.06 0.06 0.06 


60 V A 90 100 100 

110 V A 90 100 100 

220 V A 7 7 7 

440 V A 0.42 0.42 0.42 

600 V A 0.16 0.16 0.16 


60 V A 90 100 100 

110 V A 90 100 100 

220 V A 35 35 35 

440 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8 

600 V A 0.35 0.35 0.35




Main circuit 


Size 3 3 3 


Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC h-1 5000 5000 5000 

No-load switching frequency DC h-1 1000 1000 1000 

Dependence of the switching frequency AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 900 900 

z’ on the operational current I’ AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 400 400 350 

and operational voltage U’: AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 1000 850 

z’ = z . (Ie/I’) . (400 V/U’) 1.5 . 1/h AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 300 300 250 

Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 15 15 15 

Contactor Type LSD3.. 

Size 3 





connected Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 4 ... 50 


Solid mm² 4 ... 70 



AWG cables, AWG 10 ... 2/0 





Solid mm² 10 ... 70 



AWG cables, AWG 10 ... 2/0 


Both clamping points Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (2.5 ... 35) 

connected Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (4 ... 35) 

Stranded mm² 2 x (2.5 ... 16) 

Solid mm² 2 x (4 ... 50) 



mm 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 

AWG cables, 


AWG 2 x (10 ... 1/0) 

Terminal screw M6 (hex. socket, A/F 4) 

- tightening torque Nm 4 ... 6 (36 ... 53 lb.in) 

Connection for drilled copper bars1) Max. width mm 10 

Without box terminal with Finely stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 503) 

cable lugs2) Stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 703) 

(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) AWG cables, 



AWG 7 ... 1/0 

Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 4); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 4) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4) 


AWG cables, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 4); 2 x (18 ... 14) 4); 



1 x 12 


Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals 




AWG cables, 


AWG 2 x (24 ... 14) 

1) If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request). 

2) If conductors larger than 25 mm2 are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request). 

3) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234. Cable lug max. 20 mm wide. 


apply. 

Page 

53

Page 

54 




General data 

Size 6 6 6 


The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. 

' 

' 

# # 

 

Mechanical endurance Operating 

cycles 

10 million 


1) 





V 690 


A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed 


Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F 

Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60/+55 with AS-Interface 


Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP00/open, coil assembly IP20 

Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe with cover 

Shock resistance Rectangular pulse g/ms 8.5/5 and 4.2/10 

Sine pulse g/ms 13.4/5 and 6.5/10 


2) 


Short-circuit protection 

3) 

Main circuit For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see 







A 80 160 




A 10 

Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (Ik < 400 A) 



3) See second page of chapter Technical Specifications “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)“. 




Contactor Type LSD6. 

Control 

Size 6 

Operating range of the solenoid AC/DC (UC) 

Power consumption of the solenoid 

when coil is cool and rated range Us min ... Us max) 

Conventional operating mechanism 

0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max 

- AC operation Closing at Us min VA/p.f. 250/0.9 

Closing at Us max VA/p.f. 300/0.9 

Closed at Us min VA/p.f. 4.8/0.8 

Closed at Us max VA/p.f. 5.8/0.8 

- DC operation Closing at Us min W 300 

Closing at Us max W 360 

Closed at Us min W 4.3 

Closed at Us max W 5.2 

PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) 24 V DC/≤ 30 mA power consumption, 

(operating range 17 ... 30 V DC) 

Operating times (Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time) 


- with 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max Closing delay ms 20 ... 95 


- with Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 25 ... 50 


Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 

Page 

55

Page 

56 




Main circuit 

AC capacity 



Size 6 6 6 


at 60 °C up to 690 V A 140 160 185 

at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 80 90 100 

Rated power for AC loads1) at 230 V kW 53 60 70 

P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 92 105 121 

500 V kW 115 131 152 

690 V kW 159 181 210 

1000 V kW 131 148 165 

Minimum conductor cross-section for At 40 °C mm² 70 95 95 

loads with Ie 

Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 

At 60 °C mm² 50 70 95 


690 V A 115 150 170 

1000 V A 53 65 65 

Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 37 50 61 

or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 64 84 104 

500 V kW 81 105 132 

690 V kW 113 146 167 

1000 V kW 75 90 90 


Power loss per main current path 

Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie) at Ie/AC-3/500 V W 7 9 13 


Rated power for squirrel-cage 

motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 

at 400 V kW 55 75 90 



690 V A 48 57 65 

1000 V A 34 38 42 

- rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 16 20 25 

with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 29 38 45 

500 V kW 37 47 57 

690 V kW 48 55 65 



Rated operational current Ie 1000 V kW 49 55 60 

For inrush current n = 20 up to 690 V A 115 148 148 


Rating P 

up to 690 V A 90 99 99 

For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 45 58 58 

400 V kVA 79 102 102 

500 V kVA 99 128 128 

690 V kVA 137 176 176 

1000 V kVA 80 98 117 


400 V kVA 62 68 68 

500 V kVA 77 85 85 

690 V kVA 107 118 118 

1000 V kVA 80 98 117 


Px =P . 

n30 30/x 





Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 42 50 58 

banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 72 86 100 

inductance of 6 μH between capacitors 500 V kvar 90 108 125 

connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 72 86 100 


2) According to IEC 60947-4-1.




Main circuit 

DC capacity 




Size 6 6 6 


60 V A 160 

110 V A 18 

220 V A 3.4 

440 V A 0.8 

600 V A 0.5 


60 V A 160 

110 V A 160 

220 V A 20 

440 V A 3.2 

600 V A 1.6 


60 V A 160 

110 V A 160 

220 V A 160 

440 V A 11.5 




600 V A 4 


60 V A 7.5 

110 V A 2.5 

220 V A 0.6 

440 V A 0.17 

600 V A 0.12 


60 V A 160 

110 V A 160 

220 V A 2.5 

440 V A 0.65 

600 V A 0.37 


60 V A 160 

110 V A 160 

220 V A 160 

440 V A 1.4 



600 V A 0.75 

Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency h-1 2000 2000 

Dependence of the switching AC-1 h-1 800 800 

frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h-1 400 300 

current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 1000 750 

z’ = z (Ie/I’) (400 V/U’) 1.5 1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130 

Page 

57

Page 

58 



Contactor Type LSD6 

Conductor cross-sections of main conductors 

Size 6 

Screw terminals Main conductors: 

without box terminal/busbar connection 

(box terminals on request) 

Screw terminals 

Finely stranded with cable lug1) mm² 16 ... 95 

Stranded with cable lug1) mm² 25 ... 120 

AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil 

Connecting bar (max. width) mm 17 

Terminal screw M8 x 25 (A/F 13) 

- Tightening torque 


Nm 10 ... 14 (89 ... 124 lb.in) 

Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947; 

max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4) 



Terminal screw M3 (PZ 2) 


Cage Clamp terminals Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals 

(on request) Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) 



AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24...14) 

1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46235, use LSZ6 D001 terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm² to ensure phase spacing. 


apply.



Contactor Type LSDE22 LSDE26 LSDE30 

General data 


Size 10 10 10 


# # 


surface. 

' 

' 


cycles 

10 million 


1) 





V 690 












2) 



Main circuit 



3) 

- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 500 

EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 400 


A 250 




A 10 

Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic 






Page 

59

Page 

60 




Control 

Size 10 10 10 



(when coil is cool and rated range Us min ... Usmax) Conventional operating mechanism 









Closed at Us max W 7.4 

PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) (on request) 

Operating times (Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time) 


24 V DC/≤ 30 mA power consumption, (operating range 17 ... 30 V DC) 



- for Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 35 ... 50 


Arcing time ms 10 ... 15




Main circuit 

AC capacity 



Size 10 10 10 

Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 275 330 

at 60 °C up to 690 V A 250 300 

at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 100 150 

Rated power for AC loads1) at 230 V kW 94 113 

P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 164 197 

500 V kW 205 246 

690 V kW 283 340 

1000 V kW 164 246 

Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm2 150 185 

loads with Ie at 60 °C mm2 Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 

120 185 


690 V A 225 265 280 

1000 V A 68 95 95 

Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 73 85 97 

or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 128 151 171 

500 V kW 160 189 215 

690 V kW 223 265 280 

1000 V kW 90 132 132 



Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie) at Ie/AC-3/500 V W 17 18 22 




at 400 V kW 110 132 160 



690 V A 85 105 115 

1000 V A 42 57 57 

- rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 30 37 40 

with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 54 66 71 

500 V kW 67 82 87 

690 V kW 82 102 112 



Rated operational current Ie 1000 V kW 59 80 80 

For inrush current n = 20 up to 690 V A 227 265 273 


Rating power P 

up to 690 V A 151 182 182 


400 V kVA 157 183 189 

500 V kVA 196 229 236 

690 V kVA 271 317 326 

1000 V kVA 117 164 164 


400 V kVA 105 126 126 

500 V kVA 130 158 158 

690 V kVA 180 217 217 

1000 V kVA 117 164 164 


Px =P . 

n30 30/x 




Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 183 200 


banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 127 152 

inductance of 6 μH between capacitors 500 V kvar 159 191 

connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 127 152 


2) According to IEC 60947-4-1. 

Page 

61

Page 

62 




Main circuit 

DC capacity 




Size 10 10 10 


60 V A 200 300 

110 V A 18 33 

220 V A 3.4 3.8 

440 V A 0.8 0.9 

600 V A 0.5 0.6 


60 V A 200 300 

110 V A 200 300 

220 V A 20 300 

440 V A 3.2 4 

600 V A 1.6 2 


60 V A 200 300 

110 V A 200 300 

220 V A 200 300 

440 V A 11.5 11 




600 V A 4 5.2 


60 V A 7.5 11 

110 V A 2.5 3 

220 V A 0.6 0.6 

440 V A 0.17 0.18 

600 V A 0.12 0.125 


60 V A 200 300 

110 V A 200 300 

220 V A 2.5 2.5 

440 V A 0.65 0.65 

600 V A 0.37 0.37 


60 V A 200 300 

110 V A 200 300 

220 V A 200 300 

440 V A 1.4 1.4 



600 V A 0.75 0.75 

Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency h-1 2000 2000 2000 

Dependence of the switching AC-1 h-1 800 800 750 

frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h-1 250 300 250 

current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 500 700 500 

z’ = z (Ie/I’) (400 V/U’) 1.5 .1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130 130



Contactor Type LSDE. 


Size 10 






AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil 





Nm 14 ... 24 (124 ... 210 lb.in) 


max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4) 










1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN46234 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more and according to DIN46235 for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more, the 

LSZED001 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance. 


apply. 

Page 

63

Page 

64 



Contactor Type LSDG41 LSDG51 

General data 


Size 12 12 


# # 


surface. 

' 

' 


cycles 

10 million 


1) 





V 690 












2) 



Main circuit 



3) 




A 250 315 




A 10 

or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic 









Control 

Size 12 12 



(when coil is cool and rated range Us min ... Usmax) Conventional operating mechanism 









Closed at Us max W 10 

PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) (on request) 

Operating times 

(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time) 


24 V DC/≤ 30 mA power consumption, (operating range 17 ... 30 V DC) 



- for Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 50 ... 70 


Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 

Page 

65

Page 

66 




Main circuit 

AC capacity 



Size 12 12 


at 60 °C up to 690 V A 400 550 

at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 200 200 

Rated power for AC loads1) at 230 V kW 151 208 

P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 263 362 

500 V kW 329 452 

690 V kW 454 624 

1000 V kW 329 329 

Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm2 2 x 150 2 x 185 

loads with Ie at 60 °C mm2 Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 

240 2 x 185 


690 V A 400 450 

1000 V A 180 180 

Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 132 164 

or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 231 291 

500 V kW 291 363 

690 V kW 400 453 

1000 V kW 250 250 

Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 3200 4000 


Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie) at Ie/AC-3/500 V W 35 55 

Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 350 430 



at 400 V kW 200 250 


- rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 150 175 

690 V A 135 150 

1000 V A 80 80 

- rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 48 56 

with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 85 98 

500 V kW 105 123 

690 V kW 133 148 



Rated operational current Ie 1000 V kW 113 113 

For inrush current n = 20 up to 690 V A 377 404 


Rating power P 

up to 690 V A 251 270 

For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 150 161 

400 V kVA 261 280 

500 V kVA 326 350 

690 V kVA 450 483 

1000 V kVA 311 311 

For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 100 107 

400 V kVA 173 187 

500 V kVA 217 234 

690 V kVA 300 323 

1000 V kVA 311 311 


Px =P . 

n30 30/x 






banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 199 282 

inductance of 6 μH between capacitors 500 V kvar 248 352 

connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 199 282 


2) According to IEC 60947-4-1.




Main circuit 

DC capacity 




Size 12 12 


60 V A 330 

110 V A 33 

220 V A 3.8 

440 V A 0.9 

600 V A 0.6 


60 V A 400 

110 V A 400 

220 V A 400 

440 V A 4 

600 V A 2 


60 V A 400 

110 V A 400 

220 V A 400 

440 V A 11 




600 V A 5.2 


60 V A 11 

110 V A 3 

220 V A 0.6 

440 V A 0.18 

600 V A 0.125 


60 V A 400 

110 V A 400 

220 V A 2.5 

440 V A 0.65 

600 V A 0.37 


60 V A 400 

110 V A 400 

220 V A 400 

440 V A 1.4 



600 V A 0.75 

Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency h-1 2000 2000 

Dependence of the switching AC-1 h-1 700 500 

frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h-1 200 170 

current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 500 420 

z’ = z (Ie/I’) (400 V/U’) 1.5 1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130 

Page 

67

Page 

68 



Contactor Type LSDG. 


Size 12 






AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil 





Nm 14 ... 24 (124 ... 210 lb.in) 


max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4) 










1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN46234 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more and according to DIN46235 for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more, the 

LSZED001 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance. 


apply.



Contactor Type LSSD07 LSSD09 LSSD12 LSS012 LSS017 LSS025 

LSDD07 LSDD09 LSDD12 LSD009 LSD012 LSD017 LSD025 

Size 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 

CSA and UL rated data 

Rated insulation voltage V AC 600 600 

Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C 

Maximum horsepower ratings 

(CSA and UL approved values) 

Open and enclosed A 20 35 

Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 1.5 2 3 2 3 5 7.5 

at 60 Hz 230 V hp 2 3 3 3 3 5 7.5 

460 V hp 3 5 7.5 5 7.5 10 15 

575 V hp 5 7.5 10 7.5 10 15 20 

Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 

(contactor or overload relay) CLASS RK5 fuse A 60 60 60 70 70 70 100 

Circuit breakers with overload 

protection acc. to UL 489 

A 50 50 50 70 70 70 100 

Combination motor controllers type E acc. to UL 508 

At 480 V Type -- -- -- BES0 

A -- -- -- 8 10 16 22 

kA -- -- -- 65 65 65 65 

At 600 V Type -- -- -- BES0 

A -- -- -- 8 10 12.5 12.5 

kA -- -- -- 25 25 25 25 

NEMA/EEMAC ratings 

NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 0 -- 1 

Uninterrupted current Open A -- 18 -- 27 

Enclosed A -- 18 -- 27 

Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp -- 3 -- 7.5 

at 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 3 -- 7.5 

460 V hp -- 5 -- 10 

575 V hp -- 5 -- 10 

Thermal Overload relays Type LSTD LST0 

Setting range A 0.11 ... 12 1.8 ... 25 

Contactor Type LSD232 LSD240 LSD250 LSD365 LSD380 LSD395 


Size 2 2 2 3 3 3 





Open and enclosed A 45 55 50 90 105 105 

Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 10 10 15 20 25 30 

at 60 Hz 230 V hp 10 15 15 25 30 30 

460 V hp 25 30 40 50 60 75 

575 V hp 30 40 50 60 75 100 

Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 5 5 5 10 10 10 

(contactor or overload relay) CLASS RK5 fuse A 125 150 200 250 300 350 



A 125 150 200 250 300 400 

Combination motor controllers type E acc. to UL 508 

At 480 V Type BES2 BES3 

A 32 40 50 63 75 100 

kA 65 65 65 65 65 65 

At 600 V Type BES3 BES3 

A 32 40 50 63 75 75 

kA 25 25 25 30 30 30 


NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 2 -- 3 

Uninterrupted current Open A -- 45 -- 90 

Enclosed A -- 45 -- 90 

Rated power at 200 V hp -- 10 -- 25 

for induction motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 15 -- 30 

460 V hp -- 25 -- 50 

575 V hp -- 25 -- 50 

Thermal Overload relays Type LST2 LST3 

Setting range A 5.5 ... 50 18 ... 100 

Page 

69

Page 

70 



Contactor Size 00 0 ... 12 

Screw terminals and Screw terminals and Screw terminals and 

Cage Clamp terminals Cage Clamp terminals Cage Clamp terminals 

Integrated or 1- and 4-pole Laterally 

snap-on snap-on mountable 

auxiliary contact block auxiliary contact block auxiliary contact block 

CSA and UL rated data for the auxiliary contacts 

Rated voltage V AC 600 600 600 

Switching capacity A 600, Q 600 A 600, Q 600 A 300, Q 300 

Uninterrupted current 

at 240 V AC A 10 10 10 

Contactor Type LSD611 LSD615 LSD619 LSDE22 LSDE26 LSDE30 


Size 6 6 6 10 10 10 





Open and enclosed A 140 195 195 250 330 330 

Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 40 50 60 60 75 100 

at 60 Hz 230 V hp 50 60 75 75 100 125 

460 V hp 100 125 150 150 200 250 

575 V hp 125 150 200 200 250 300 

Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 10 10 10 10 18 18 

CLASS RK5/L fuse A 450 500 500 700 800 800 



A 350 450 500 500 700 800 


NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 4 -- -- -- 5 

Uninterrupted current Open A -- 150 -- -- -- 300 

Enclosed A -- 135 -- -- -- 270 

Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp -- 40 -- -- -- 75 

with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 50 -- -- -- 100 

460 V hp -- 100 -- -- -- 200 

575 V hp -- 100 -- -- -- 200 



Size 12 12 

Rated insulation voltage V AC 600 





Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 125 150 

at 60 Hz 230 V hp 150 200 

460 V hp 300 400 

575 V hp 400 500 

Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 18 30 

CLASS L fuse A 1000 1200 



A 900 900 


NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 6 

Uninterrupted current Open A -- 600 

Enclosed A -- 540 

Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp -- 150 

with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 200 

460 V hp -- 400 

575 V hp -- 400


W LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 335 ... 450 kW – OVERVIEW 

IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) 

The LSDH contactors are climate-proof. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal covers may have to be 

fitted onto the connecting bars, depending on the configuration with other devices (see chapter “Products and order 

numbers” – terminal covers). 

W FUNCTION 

W MAIN CONTACTS 

Contact erosion indication with LSDH 6/8 vacuum contactors 

The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked during operation with the help of 3 white double slides 

on the contactor base. If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed 

position, the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum reliability, it is recommended to replace all 3 

vacuum interrupters. 

W AUXILIARY CONTACTS 

Contact reliability 

The auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-state circuits 

With currents ≥ 1 mA 

And voltages from 17 V. 


Control circuit 

Protection of coils against overvoltages: 

AC operation 

Fitted with varistors as standard 

DC operation 

Retrofitting options: 

With varistors 

If LSDH 6/8 is to be used for DC operation, an additional reversing contactor is required; this is included in the scope of 

supply in the same packaging as the vacuum contactor. 

W ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC) 

LSDH 6/8 contactors for AC operation are fitted with an electronically controlled solenoid operating mechanism with a 

high interference immunity. 

Contactor Rated control Overvoltage Degree of Overvoltage 

type supply type severity strength 

voltage U s (IEC 60801) (IEC 60801) 

LSDH6. 110 ... 132 V Burst 3 2 kV 

LSDHB. Surge 4 6 kV 

200 ... 277 V Burst 4 4 kV 

Surge 4 5 kV 

380 ... 600 V Burst 4 4 kV 

Surge 4 6 kV 

Note: 

During operation in installations in which the emitted interference limits cannot be observed, e.g. when used for output 

contactors in converters, LSDH6/8 contactors without a main conductor path circuit are recommended (see description 

next page). 

Page 

71

Page 

72 


W LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 335 ... 450 kW – OVERVIEW 

W APPLICATION 

The standard LSDH6. and LSDHB. contactors with electronically controlled contactor mechanism, have high resistance to 

electromagnetic interference. 

Causes for such interference can be, for example: 

Frequency converters which are operated nearby can cause periodic overvoltages at the control level of the contactors. 

High-energy pulses cause by switching operations and atmospheric discharges can cause interference on the control 

cables. 

To reduce interference voltages caused by frequency converters, the manufacturer recommends the use of e.g. input 

filters, output filters, grounding or shielding in the installation. 

Further measures that should be applied for overvoltage damping: 

Feeding the contactors using control transformer according to EN 60204 - rather than directly from the network 

Use of surge arresters, if required 

W CONNECTION 


The rectifier bridge is connected to varistors for protection against overvoltages. The built-in rectifier bridge affords 

sufficient protection for the coils. 

Main circuit 

As standard LSDH. contactors with integrated RC varistors. 

W PROTECTION OF THE MAIN CURRENT PATHS 

An integrated RC varistor connection for the main current paths of the contactors dampens the switching overvoltage 

rises to safe values. This prevents multiple restriking. The operator of an installation can therefore rest assured that the 

motor winding cannot be damaged by switching overvoltages with steep voltage rises. 

Important note: 

The overvoltage damping circuit is not required if LSDH 6/8 contactors are used in circuits with DC choppers, frequency 

converters or speed-variable operating mechanisms, for example. It could be damaged by the voltage peaks and 

harmonics which are generated. This may cause phase-to-phase short-circuits in the contactors. 

Solution: 

Order special contactor version without overvoltage damping. (on request)


W LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 335 ... 450 kW 

Contactor Type LSDH6 and LSDH8 

Rated data of the auxiliary contacts Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200) 

Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) 

V 690 

Continuous thermal current 

Ith =Rated operational current Ie/AC-12 AC load 

Rated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14 for rated operational voltage Ue A 10 

24 V A 10 

110 V A 10 

125 V A 10 

220 V A 6 

230 V A 5.6 

380 V A 4 

400 V A 3.6 

500 V A 2.5 

660 V A 2.5 

690 V A 2.3 

DC load 

Rated operational current Ie/DC-12 for rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 10 

60 V A 10 

110 V A 3.2 

125 V A 2.5 

220 V A 0.9 

440 V A 0.33 

600 V A 0.22 

Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 for rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 10 

60 V A 5 

110 V A 1.14 

125 V A 0.98 

220 V A 0.48 

440 V A 0.13 

600 V A 0.07 

CSA and UL rated data for the auxiliary contacts 

Rated voltage V AC, 

max. 

600 

Switching capacity A 600, P 600 

Page 

73

Page 

74 




The contact endurance for utilization category AC-12 or AC-15/AC-14 depends mainly on 

the breaking current. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, 

i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system. 

Contact erosion indication with LSDH6 and LSDH8 vacuum contactors 


LSDH6 and LSDH8 contactors 

Legend for the diagrams: 




LSDH6 and LSDH8 contactors at 230 V AC 

The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked during operation with the help of 3 white double slides on the contactor base. 

If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed position, the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum reliability, it is recommended 

to replace all 3 vacuum interrupters. 

LSDH6 LSDH8 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Operating



Contactor Type LSDH6 LSDH8 

General data 

Size 14 14 

Permissible mounting position, 

installation instructions1) 2) 



surface. 

AC operation and DC operation 


cycles 

5 million 

Electrical endurance Operating 

cycles 

3) 

Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) kV 1 




kV 1 






Finger-safe with cover 

Rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 8.1/5 and 4.7/10 9.5/5 and 5.7/10 

DC operation g/ms 9/5 and 5.7/10 8.6/5 and 5.1/10 

Sine pulse AC operation g/ms 12.8/5 and 7.4/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10 

DC operation g/ms 14.4/5 and 9.1/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10 

Conductor cross-sections See Conductor Cross-Sections page 78 



Main circuit 



4) 



Weld-free5) ' 

' 

# # 

 


A 400 500 



(weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1kA) 

A 10 

Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (I k < 400 A) A 10 

1) To easily replace the laterally mounted auxiliary switches it is recommended to maintain a minimum distance of 30 mm between the contactors. 

2) If mounted at a 90° angle (conducting paths are horizontally above each other), the switching frequency is reduced by 80 % compared with the normal values. 

3) See page before “Endurance of the auxiliary contacts”. 

4) See first page of chapter Technical Specifications – LSDH vacuum contactors “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)“. 


Page 

75

Page 

76 




Control 

Size 14 14 

Magnetic coil operating range 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max 

Power consumption of the magnetic coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us) AC operation, Us max - Closing VA/p.f. 1850/1 950/0.98 

- Closed VA/p.f. 49/0.15 30.6/0.31 

AC operation, Us min - Closing VA/p.f. 1200/1 600/0.98 

- Closed VA/p.f. 13.5/0.47 12.9/0.43 

DC economy circuit1) - Closing at 24 V W 1010 960 

- Closed W 28 20.6 

Operating times at 0,8 ... 1.1 x Us (Values apply to cold and warm coil) 


AC operation - Closing delay ms 70 ... 120 (22 ... 65) 2) 80 ... 120 

- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70 ... 80 

DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 76 ... 110 86 ... 280 

- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25 

Arcing time 

Operating times at 1.0 x Us ms 10 ... 15 10 


AC operation - Closing delay ms 80 ... 100 (30 ... 45) 2) 85 ... 100 

- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70 

DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 80 ... 90 90 ... 125 

- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25 

Minimum command duration Standard ms 120 120 

for closing Reduced make-time ms 90 -- 

Minimum interval time between two ON commands ms 100 300 

1) At 24 V DC; for further voltages, deviations of up to ±10 % are possible. 

2) Values in brackets apply to contactors with reduced operating times.




Main circuit 

AC capacity 



Size 14 14 


at 55 °C up to 690 V A 630 850 

at 55 °C up to 1000 V A 450 800 

Rated power for AC loads 230 V kW 240 323 

with p.f. = 0.95 at 55°C 400 V kW 415 558 

500 V kW 545 735 

690 V kW 720 970 

1000 V kW 780 1385 

Minimum conductor cross-sections for loads at 40°C mm² 2 x 240 Ie ≥ 800 A: 2 x 60 x 5 (Cu busbars) 

with Ie 

Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 

at 55°C mm² 2 x 185 Ie < 800 A: 2 x 240 


1000 V A 435 580 

Rated power for slipring or squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 200 260 

motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 347 450 

500 V kW 434 600 

690 V kW 600 800 

Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie) 1000 V kW 600 800 

Rated operational current Ie up to 690 V A 610 690 

Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with 50 

Hz and 60 Hz 

at 400 V kW 355 400 



1000 V A 210 250 

Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 97 110 

with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 168 191 

500 V1) kW 210 250 

690 V1) kW 278 335 

1000 V1) Utilization category AC-6a 


A 290 350 

Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V 

For inrush current n = 20 A 513 675 


Rating P 

A 342 450 

For inrush current n = 20 230 V kVA 195 256 

400 V kVA 338 445 

500 V kVA 444 584 

690 V kVA 586 771 

1000 V kVA 752 1003 

For inrush current n = 302) 230 V kVA 130 171 

400 V kVA 226 297 

500 V kVA 296 389 

690 V kVA 390 514 

Utilization category AC-6b, 

switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) 

AC capacitors 

1000 V kVA 592 778 

Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 433 

Rated power for single capacitors at 230 V kvar 175 

at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kvar 300 

500 V kvar 400 

690 V kvar 300 

Rated power for banks of capacitors (minimum at 230 V kvar 145 

inductance is 6 H between capacitors connected 400 V kvar 250 

in parallel) at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kvar 333 

690 V kvar 250 

1) Max. permissible rated operational current Ie/AC-4 = Ie/AC-3 up to 500 V, for reduced contact endurance and reduced switching frequency. 

2) For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows: Px = P . 

n30 30/x. 

Page 

77

Page 

78 




Main circuit 

AC capacity 

Size 14 14 

Short-time current carrying capacity (5 ... 30 s) 

CLASS 5 and 10 A 630 820 

CLASS 15 A 630 662 

CLASS 20 A 536 572 

CLASS 25 A 479 531 

CLASS 30 A 441 500 

Thermal current-carrying capacity 10-s-current1) A 5040 7000 

Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 /690 V 



W 45 70 

Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC 1/h 2000 1000 

No-load switching frequency DC 1/h 1000 1000 

AC-1 1/h 700 700 

AC-2 1/h 200 200 

AC-3 1/h 500 500 

AC-4 1/h 150 150 

Contactors with overload relays (mean value) 


1/h 15 15 


Busbar connections 

Screw terminals 

- finely stranded with cable lug mm² 50 ... 240 50 ... 240 

- stranded with cable lug mm² 70 ... 240 50 ... 240 

- solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 MCM 2/0 ... 500 MCM 

- connecting bar (max. width) mm 50 60 (Ue ≤ 690 V) 

50 (Ue > 690 V) 

Terminal screw M10 x 30 M12 x 40 


With box terminal (on request) 

- connectable copper bars 

Nm 14 ... 24 (124 ... 210 lb.in) 20 ... 35 (177 ... 310 lb.in) 

- width mm 15 ... 25 15 ... 38 

- max. thickness mm 1 x 26 or 2 x 11 1 x 46 or 2 x 18 

- terminal screw A/F 6 (hexagon socket) A/F 8 (hexagon socket) 



Nm 25 ... 40 (221 ... 354 lb.in) 35 ... 50 (266 ... 443 lb.in) 

Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1) 2)/2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2) 

Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1) 2)/2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2) 

Pin-end connector to DIN 46231 mm² 2 x (1 ... 1.5) 

Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 12) 

Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.4 (7 ... 12 lb.in) 



Uninterrupted current 




Rated power for induction motors at 

60 Hz 

at 200 V hp 231 290 

230 V hp 266 350 

460 V hp 530 700 


575 V hp 664 860 

SIZE hp 6 7 

Uninterrupted current Open A 600 820 

Enclosed A 540 810 

Rated power for induction motors at at 200 V hp 150 -- 

60 Hz 230 V hp 200 300 

460 V hp 400 600 

575 V hp 400 600 

1) According to IEC 60947-4-1. 

2) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used, this restriction does not 

apply.


W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING RESISTIVE LOADS – OVERVIEW 

W AC OPERATION 

EN60947-4-1 (VDE0660 Part102).The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to 

EN50274. The accessories for the 3-pole ALEA contactors can also be used for the 4-pole versions. 

W FUNCTION 


Isolating systems with ungrounded or poorly grounded neutral conductors 

System transfers when alternative AC power supplies are used 

As contactors, e.g.for variable-speed operating mechanisms which only have to carry current and not switch 

W INTEGRATION 

W MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACTS 

Size 00 

4 auxiliary contacts (according to EN50005) 

Size 0 

Maximum 2 auxiliary contacts (either laterally mounted or snapped onto the top). 

Size 2–3 

Maximum 4 auxiliary contacts (either laterally mounted or snapped onto the top) 

W CONTACTOR ASSEMBLY WITH MECHANICAL INTERLOCK 

The 4-pole LSR contactors with 4NO contacts as the main contacts are suitable for making contactor assemblies with a 

mechanical interlock, e.g.for system transfers. 

Size 00 

Contactor assemblies can be constructed from two LSRD contactors in conjunction with mechanical interlocks and two 

connecting clips (Order No.: LSZDW002). 

Size 0 

When constructing 4-pole contactor assemblies from two LSR0 contactors, the fourth pole of the left contactor must 

always be moved to the left side. If the laterally mountable LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock is used, the contactor 

assembly is connected with LSZ0W004 (2 pcs.). 

Sizes 2 and 3 

Contactor assemblies can be constructed from two LSR2 or two LSR3 contactors in conjunction with the laterally mountable 

LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock and the LSZ2W002 for size 2 or LSZ3W002 for size 3. 

Page 

79

Page 

80 


W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING RESISTIVE LOADS (AC-1) 

4-POLE, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A 

Contactor Type LSRD18 LSRD22 LSR035 LSR040 LSR260 LSR311 LSR314 

General data 


Size 00 0 2 3 3 

1) 


cycles 

30 million 10 million 

Electrical endurance at Ie/AC-1 Operating 

cycles 

Approx. 0.5 million 


V 690 

Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C –25 ... +60 

During storage °C –55 ... +80 

Degree of protection Device Operating IP20 IP20 

Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C Connection range cycles IP00 


Short-circuit protection of contactors without thermal overload relays 

Main circuit 

Fuse links, Type of coordination „1“ 1) A 35 63 160 250 250 

gL/gG operational class Type of coordination „2“ 1) LV HRC, DIAZED, 

NEOZED 

A 20 25/35 63 125 160 

- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ 

EN 60947-4-1 

Control 


Weld-free A 10 16 50 63 100 

AC at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us AC at 60 Hz 0.85 ...1.1 x Us DC at 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us DC at 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us Power consumption of the magnetic coils 

(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us) AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us AC operation, 50 Hz Closing VA 61 145 270 

P.f. VA 0.82 0.79 0.68 

Closed VA 7.8 12.5 22 

P.f. VA 0.24 0.36 0.27 

AC operation, 50/60 Hz Closing VA 26.5/24.3 64/63 170/155 298/274 

P.f. 0.79/0.75 0.82/0.74 0.76/0.72 0.72/0.62 

Closed VA 4.4/3.4 8.4/6.8 15/11.8 27/20 

P.f. 0.27/0.27 0.24/0.28 0.35/0.38 0.29/0.31 

DC operation 

2) 

Operating times for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us Closing 

= Closed 

W 3.3 5.6 13.3 15 


DC operation Closing delay ms 25 ... 100 30 ... 90 50 ... 110 110 ... 200 

Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 13 ... 40 15 ... 30 14 ... 20 

AC operation Closing delay ms 8 ... 35 6 ... 30 4 ... 35 20 ... 50 

Opening delay ms 4 ... 30 13 ... 25 10 ... 30 10 ... 25 

Arcing time 

Main circuit 

AC capacity 

ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 

Utilization category AC-1, switching resistive loads 

Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C, up to 690 V A 18 22 35 40 60 110 140 

at 60 °C, up to 690 V A 16 20 30 35 55 100 120 

Rated power for AC loads at 230 V kW 7 8.5 12.5 15 23 42 53 

P.f. = 0.95 (at 40 °C) 400 V kW 12 14.5 22 26 39 72 92 

Minimum conductor cross-section at 40 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 50 50 

for loads with Ie Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 

at 60 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 50 50 

Rated operational currents Ie at 60°C, up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25 26 -- -- 

Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5 5.5 -- -or 

squirrel-cage motors 

at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 

400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 11 -- -- 

1) In accordance with the corresponding 3-pole LSD contactors. 

2) With size S00, DC operation: Operating times at 0.85 ... 1.1 x U s.



4-POLE, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A 

Contactor Type LSRD18 LSRD22 LSR035 LSR040 

Main circuit 

DC capacity 

Size 00 0 

Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms) 

Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 °C) 


60 V A 18 22 20 

110 V A 2.1 2.1 4.5 

220 V A 0.8 0.8 1 

440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.4 


60 V A 18 22 35 

110 V A 12 12 35 

220 V A 1.6 1.6 5 

440 V A 0.8 0.8 1 


60 V A 18 22 35 

110 V A 18 22 35 

220 V A 18 22 35 

440 V A 1.3 1.3 2.9 


60 V A 18 22 35 

110 V A 18 22 35 

220 V A 18 22 35 

Utilization category DC-3/DC-5 



440 V A 1.3 1.3 2.9 


60 V A 0.5 0.5 5 

110 V A 0.15 0.15 2.5 

220 V A -- -- 1 

440 V A -- -- 0.09 


60 V A 5 5 35 

110 V A 0.35 0.35 15 

220 V A -- -- 3 

440 V A -- -- 0.27 


60 V A 18 20 35 

110 V A 18 20 35 

220 V A 1.5 1.5 10 

440 V A 0.2 0.2 0.6 


60 V A 18 20 35 

110 V A 18 20 35 

220 V A 1.5 1.5 35 

Maximum breaking current AC 

e.g. for isolation of load distributions 

440 V A 0.2 0.2 0.6 

50/60 Hz 400 V A 72 96 200 

Page 

81

Page 

82 



4-POLE, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A 

Contactor Type LSR260 LSR311 LSR314 

Main circuit 

DC capacity 

Size 2 3 3 

Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms) 



60 V A 23 23 60 

110 V A 4.5 4.5 9 

220 V A 1 1 2 

440 V A 0.4 0.4 0.6 


60 V A 45 70 80 

110 V A 45 70 80 

220 V A 5 5 10 

440 V A 1 1 1.8 


60 V A 45 70 80 

110 V A 45 70 80 

220 V A 45 70 80 

440 V A 2.9 2.9 4.5 


60 V A 45 70 80 

110 V A 45 70 80 

220 V A 45 70 80 

Utilization category DC-3/DC-5 



440 V A 2.9 2.9 4.5 


60 V A 6 6 6.5 

110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5 

220 V A 1 1 1 

440 V A 0.1 0.15 0.15 


60 V A 45 70 80 

110 V A 25 70 80 

220 V A 5 7 7 

440 V A 0.27 0.42 0.42 


60 V A 45 70 80 

110 V A 45 70 80 

220 V A 25 35 35 

440 V A 0.6 0.8 0.8 


60 V A 45 70 80 

110 V A 45 70 80 

220 V A 45 70 80 

Maximum breaking current AC 

e.g. for isolation of load distributions 

440 V A 0.6 0.8 0.8 

50/60 Hz 400 V A 400 520 760

W LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, 4-POLE 

Contactor Type LSH 


Size 00 

The contactors are designed for operation 

on a vertical mounting surface. 


! $ 

Upright mounting position AC operation 


Special version required 

DC operation Standard version 

Positively-driven operation of contacts in contactor relays 

LSH: Explanations: 

Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary contact block as well as between the There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the NC and NO 

basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary contact block (removable) acc. to: contacts cannot be closed at the same time. 

ZH 1/457 

EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L ZH1/457 

Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses in the metalworking industry. 

EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L 

Low-voltage controlgear, control equipment, and switching elements. 

Special requirements for positively-driven contacts 

SUVA 

Accident prevention regulations of the „Schweizer Unfallverhütungsanstalt“ 

(Swiss Institute for Accident Insurance) 

Contact reliability 

Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA acc. to EN 60947-5-4 Frequency of contact faults

Page 

84 



Contactor Type LSHD 


Basic units and auxiliary contact blocks 

Size 00 

Rated control supply voltage V AC max. 600 

Rated voltage V AC 600 

Switching capacity A 600, Q 600 

Uninterrupted current at 240 V AC 

General data 

A 10 


cycles 

30 million 

Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary Operating 10 million 

contact block cycles 

Solid-state compatible auxiliary Operating 5 million 

contact block cycles 



Safe isolation between the coil and the contacts in the basic unit 


V 400 

Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C –25 ... +60 





Finger-safe 

Rectangular pulse AC/DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10 

Sine pulse 


AC/DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10 

Screw terminals Auxiliary conductor and coil terminals Screw terminals 

(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (1 ... 4) 

Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 

AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (18 ... 14) 1 x 12 

Terminal screws M3 


Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductor and coil terminals Cage Clamp terminals 






(weld-free protection at Ik ≥1 kA) 

Fuse links, gL/gG operational class 

- DIAZED A 10 

- NEOZED A 10 

Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic 


A 6 

An „insulation stop“ must be used for conductor cross-sections ≤ 1 mm². 

Maximum external diameter of the conductor insulation: 3.6 mm.



Control 


Size 00 

AC operation at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us at 60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us DC operation at +50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us Power consumption of the magnetic coils 

(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us) 

at +60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us AC operation, 50 Hz Closing VA/p.f. 27/0.8 

Closed VA/p.f. 4.6/0.27 

AC operation, 60 Hz Closing VA/p.f. 24/0.75 

Closed VA/p.f. 3.5/0.27 

DC operation 

Permissible residual current of the electronics 

(with 0 signal) 

Closing = Closed W 3.2 

for AC operation < 3 mA x (230 V/Us) Operating times 

for DC operation

Page 

86 




Load side 

Rated operational currents Ie Size 00 

AC-12 A 10 

AC-15/AC-14 up to 230 V A 6 

for rated operational voltage Us 400 V A 3 

500 V A 2 

DC-12 

for rated operational voltage Us 690 V A 1 

1 conducting path 24 V A 10 

60 V A 6 

110 V A 3 

220 V A 1 

440 V A 0.3 

600 V A 0.15 

2 conducting paths in series 24 V A 10 

60 V A 10 

110 V A 4 

220 V A 2 

440 V A 1.3 

600 V A 0.65 


60 V A 10 

110 V A 10 

220 V A 3.6 

440 V A 2.5 

DC-13 

for rated operational voltage Us 600 V A 1.8 

1 conducting path 24 V A 101) 60 V A 2 

110 V A 1 

220 V A 0.3 

440 V A 0.14 

600 V A 0.1 


60 V A 3.5 

110 V A 1.3 

220 V A 0.9 

440 V A 0.2 

600 V A 0.1 


60 V A 4.7 

110 V A 3 

220 V A 1.2 

440 V A 0.5 

Switching frequency z 

600 V A 0.26 

In operating cycles/h AC-12/DC-12 h –1 1000 

during normal duty AC-15/AC-14 h –1 1000 

for utilization category DC-13 h –1 1000 

No-load switching frequency h –1 10000 

Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I’ and 

operational voltage U’ 

z’ = z . Ie/I’ . (Ue/U’) 1.5 . 1/h 

1) Snap-on auxiliary contact blocks: 6 A.


W LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE – OVERVIEW 

W DC OPERATION 

IEC 60947 and EN 60947 (VDE 0660). 

The LSH auxiliary contactors for switching auxiliary circuits are tailored to the special requirements of working with electronic 

controls. The LSHD ... G/N auxiliary contactors cannot be extended with auxiliary contact blocks. 

W FUNCTION 

No auxiliary contact blocks can be snapped onto these auxiliary contactors. They have a low power consumption, an extended 

magnetic coil operating range and an integrated surge suppressor for damping opening surges (exception: LSHD ... N). 

W TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the LSH auxiliary contactors. 

Contactor Type LSHD ... N LSH ... G 

Size 00 00 

Magnetic coil operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us 

Power consumption of the magnetic coil (for cold coil) 

Closing = closed 

At Us = 17 V W 1.2 

At Us = 24 V W 2.3 

At Us = 30 V W 3.6 

Permissible residual current

Page 

88 


W LSS CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE – OVERVIEW 

W DC OPERATION 

IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660). 

The LSS contactors for switching motors are tailored to the special requirements of working with electronic controls. 

The LSSD contactors cannot be extended with auxiliary contacts or contact blocks. 

Two single-pole auxiliary contacts can be fitted to the LSS0 contactors. 

W FUNCTION 

LSS contactors have a low power consumption, an extended operating range of the magnetic coil and an integrated surge 

suppressor for damping opening surges. 


All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the LSDD and LSD0 contactors for 

switching motors. The LSSD contactors cannot be extended with auxiliary contacts or contact blocks. Two single-pole auxiliary 

contacts LSZ0D010/D001 can be fitted to the LSS0 contactor (see Accessories). 

Contactor Type LSSD ... G LSS0 ... H 

Size 00 0 

General data 

Mechanical endurance Operating 30 million 10 million 

cycles 

Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts V 400 


Control 

Magnetic coil operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 x U s 

Power consumption of the at U s 17 V W 1.2 2.1 

magnetic coil 24 V W 2.3 4.2 

(for cold coil) 30 V W 3.6 6.6 

Closing = closed 

Permissible residual current < 10 mA x (24 V/U s) < 6 mA x (24 V/U s) 

of the electronics (for 0 signal) 

Overvoltage configuration of the magnetic coil With diode With varistor 

Operating times of the contactors for PLC-use 

Closing 

- at 17 V ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 120 93 ... 270 

OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 70 83 ... 250 


OFF-delay NC ms 20 ... 40 55 ... 78 


OFF-delay NC ms 15 ... 30 45 ... 56 

Opening at 17... 30 V OFF-delay NO ms 40 ... 60 18 ... 19 

ON-delay NC ms 60 ... 70 24 ... 25


W ACCESSORIES FOR LSD AND LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW 

W SNAP-ON AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS 

The auxiliary contact blocks and the maximum number of contacts that can be mounted are described in the sections 

„Contactors“ and „Auxiliary Contactors“. 

Operation 

In the case of the versions for rated control supply voltages of 110 V and 230 V, either AC voltage or DC voltage can be applied 

on the line side, whereas the variant for 24 V is designed for DC operation only. A DC-operated contactor is connected to the 

output in accordance with the input voltage that is applied. The mean value of the OFF-delay is approximately 1.5 times the 

specified minimum time. 


(also for Cage Clamp terminals on request) size 00, 0, 2, 3, 6 to 12 

All LSD contactors and LSH auxiliary contactors can be retrofitted with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surges 

in the coil. Diodes or diode assemblies can be used. The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size 00 contactors. 

Space is provided for them next to a snap-on auxiliary contact block. With all size 0 to 3 contactors, varistors, RC elements and 

diode assemblies can be plugged on directly at the coil terminals, either on the top or underneath. The plug-in direction of the 

diodes and diode assemblies is determined by a coding device. Auxiliary contactors are supplied either without overvoltage 

damping or with a varistor or diode connected as standard, according to the version. 

Note: The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are 

damped against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms). 

W SOLDER PIN ADAPTERS 

The solder pin adapters for the size 00 contactors are available in version for: 

contactors with one integrated auxiliary contact 

W SEALABLE COVERS FOR SIZES 00 TO 12 (ON REQUEST) 

When contactors and auxiliary contactors are used in safety-oriented applications, it must be ensured that it is impossible to operate 

the contactors manually. For ALEA contactors there are sealable covers available for this purpose on requets; these prevent 

accidental manual operation. These are transparent molded-plastic caps with a bracket that enables the contactor to be sealed. 

W MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK 

Technical specifications according to EN 61812-1 (VDE 0435 Part 2021) 

Contactor Type LSZ00113 

Mechanical latching block for the LSD0 and LSD2 contactors 


V 690 

Mechanical endurance with LSD0 3 million 

(operating cycles) 

Permissible ambient temperature 

with LSD2 50000 

During operation °C –25 ... +60 


Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 

Operating range of the magnetic coil 

at AC 50/60 Hz and DC 

0.85 ... 1.1 x Us Power consumption of the magnetic coils of the unlocking magnet 

(for cold coil and 1.0 x Us) AC and DC operation 

Command duration for de-energizing 

W Approx. 4 

AC operation ms 18 ... 31 

DC operation 


ms 18 ... 26 

Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 4 

AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12 

Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 2.5 

AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12 

Tightening torque of the terminal screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.1 

lb.in 7 ... 9.5 

Page 

89

Page 

90 


W LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW 


IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660) 

The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The LSK capacitor contactors 

are special version of the size 00 to 3 ALEA contactors. The capacitors are precharged by means of the mounted leading NO 

contacts and resistors; only then do the main contacts close. This prevents disturbances in the network and welding of the 

contactors. Only discharged capacitors are permitted to be switched on with capacitor contactors. The auxiliary contact block 

which is snapped onto the capacitor contactor contains the three leading NO contacts and in the case of 00 one standard NC 

contact and in the case of 0 and 3 one standard NO contact, which is unassigned. Size 00 also contains another unassigned 

NO contact in the basic unit. In addition, a 2-pole auxiliary contact block can be mounted laterally on the LSK3 capacitor 

contactors (1 NO + 1 NC versions); type LSZ0D711. The fitting of auxiliary switches for LSKD and LSK0 is not expandable. For 

the capacitor switching capacity of the basic LSD contactor version, see Technical specifications. 

W MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS 

In the area of capacitor switching contactors, difficulty inflammable and self-extinguishing materials may be used only, 

because abnormal temperatures within the area of the resistance spirals cannot be excluded. 


All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the LSDD contactors for size 00, to those 

of the LSD0 contactors for size 0 and to those of the LSD3 contactors for size 3. 

Contactor Type LSKD17B3 LSK03213 LSK36213 

Size 00 0 3 

Capacitor rating at 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 3 … 7.5 3.5 … 15 3.5 … 30 

rated power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 5 … 12.5 6 … 25 5 … 50 

(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 7.5 … 15 7.8 … 30 7.5 … 60 

690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 10 … 21 10 … 42 10 … 84 

Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO 

Auxiliary contacts mountable (lateral), not for sizes 00 and 0 -- 2 NC + 2 NO or 

1 NO + 1 NC 

Magnetic coil operating range 0.8 … 1.1 x U s 

Max. switching frequency h –1 180 100 

Electrical endurance Operating > 250000 > 150000 > 100000 

cycles 

Ambient temperature °C ≤ 60 

Standards IEC 60947/EN 60947 (VDE 0660) 

Short-circuit protection 1.6 ... 2.2 x I e 


Screw terminals Main conductors Screw terminals 

(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5); 

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 

Acc. to IEC 60947; Acc. to IEC 60947; 

Max. 2 x (1 ... 4) Max. 1 x 10 1) 

Coil voltage 

1) BEZ00116 feeder terminal for 25 mm² 

Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5); 

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 1) 

AWG cables 

- solid AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (16 ... 12) 

- solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10) 

- stranded AWG 1 x 12 1 x 8 

Terminal screws M3 M4 (Pozidriv size 2) 

- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 

lb.in 7 ... 10.3 18 ... 22 

0.85 – 1.1 x UN 230 VAC; 50/60 Hz 230 VAC; 50 Hz 230 VAC; 50 Hz

W LSK CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, 12.5 ... 50 kVAR 


Contactor Type LSKD17B3 LSK03213 LSK36213 


Size 00 0 3 





Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16 

Stranded mm² 4 ... 70 



mm 6 x 9 x 0.8 

AWG cables, 


AWG 10 ... 2/0 



Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16 

Stranded mm² 10 ... 70 



mm 6 x 9 x 0.8 

AWG cables, 


AWG 10 ... 2/0 

Both clamping points Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² Max. 2 x 35 

connected Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² Max. 2 x 35 

Solid mm² Max. 2 x 16 

Stranded mm² Max. 2 x 50 



mm 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 

AWG cables, 


AWG 2 x (10 ... 1/0) 

Terminal screw M6 (hex. socket, A/F 4) 

- tightening torque Nm 4 ... 6 

lb.in 36 ... 53 

Connection for drilled copper bars1) Max. width mm 10 

Without box terminal with cable lugs2) Finely stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 503) (1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 703) AWG cables, 



AWG 7 ... 1/0 

Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 4); 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 4); 

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 4) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 4) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947; 

acc. to IEC 60947; 

max. 2 x (1 ... 4) 

max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4) 

Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 4); 

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 4) 

AWG cables, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 4); 

solid or stranded 2 x (18 ... 14) 4); 1 x 12 


- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 

lb.in 7 ... 10.3 

Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors: 




AWG cables, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14) 

solid or stranded SD 

1) If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance. (on request) 

2) When connecting conductors which are larger than 25 mm2, the terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance. (on request) 

3) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234. Cable lug max. 20 mm wide. 

4) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used, this restriction does not apply. 

Page 

91

Page 

92 




Contactors LA3K are suitable for switching low-inductive and low loss capacitors in capacitor banks (IEC70 and 831, 

VDE 0560) without and with reactors. Capacitor switching contactors are fitted with early make contacts and damping 

resistors, to reduce the value of make current


acc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660 


Contactor Type LA3K5044 LA3K6233 LA3K7433 LA3K9033 LA3K1133 

Capacitor rating at 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 12 – 20 12 – 28 12 – 30 22 – 40 20 – 50 

rated power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 20 – 33.3 20 – 50 20 – 60 33 – 75 33 – 80 

(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 26 – 43 26 – 64 26 – 75 45 – 95 45 – 115 

690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 30 – 48 30 – 72 30 – 87 50 – 108 50 – 130 

Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) -- -- -- -- -- 

Auxiliary contacts mountable snap on front 1NC/6A 

LA190135 

1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A 

LA190100 LA190100 LA190100 LA190100 LA190100 

1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A 

LA190101 LA190101 LA190101 LA190101 LA190101 

side mounted 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A 

LA190134 LA190134 LA190134 LA190134 LA190134 

Magnetic coil operating range -- -- -- -- -- 

Max. switching frequency h –1 120 120 80 80 80 

Electrical endurance Operating 

cycles 

150000 150000 120000 120000 120000 

Rated operational current Ie at 50°C A 30 – 48 30 – 72 30 – 108 50 – 115 50 – 144 

at 60°C A 30 – 48 30 – 72 30 – 78 50 – 108 50 – 130 

Ambient temperature °C ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1) 

Standards IEC 947-4-1 / EN 60947-4-1 / VDE 0660 



For contactors without thermal overload relay 

fuse gL/gG A 80 – 160 125 – 160 160 – 200 160 – 200 160 – 250 

1 cable per clamp solid or stranded mm² 4 – 50 

flexible mm² 10 – 35 

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 6 – 35 

2 cable per clamp top below 

solid or stranded mm² 50 + 4 / 35 + 6 / 25 + (6 – 16) 

16 + (6 – 16) / 10 + (6 – 16) 

0.5 – 95 10 – 120 

flexible mm² 50 + (4 – 10) / 35 + (4 – 16) 

25 + (4 – 25) / 16 + (4 – 16) 

0.5 – 70 10 – 95 

Cables per clamp 

For main connector 

2 1 + 1 

1 cable per clamp solid AWG 12 – 10 

flexible AWG 10 – 0 

2 cable per clamp top below 

solid AWG 10 + (12 – 10) / 12 + 12 18 – 10 -flexible 

AWG 1 + (12 – 10) / 2 + (8 – 12) 

3 + (12 – 8) / 4 + (10 – 6) 

18 – 3 / 0 8 – 4 / 0 

Cables per clamp 2 1 + 1 

Coil voltage 

0.85 – 1.1 x UN 230 VAC; 50 Hz 

Mechanical life AC operated S x 106 10 10 10 10 5 

DC operated S x 106 10 10 10 10 5 

Short time current 10 S current A 360 504 592 680 880 

Power loss per pole at Ie / AC3 400V W 2.2 3.9 5.5 4.3 6.0 

1) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x US and with reduced rated current Ie/AC1 accordung to Ie/AC3 

Page 

93

Page 

94 



aacc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660 

Mounted auxiliary contacts Type LA3K18 LA3K24,..32,..40 LA3K50,..62,..74 LA3K90,..115 

Rated insulation voltage Ui 1) Thermal rated current Ith to 690V 

V~ 690 -- -- -- 

Ambient temperature 40°C A 16 -- -- -- 

Utilization category AC15 

60°C A 12 -- -- -- 

Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A 12 -- -- -- 

380-415V A 4 -- -- -- 

440V A 4 -- -- -- 

500V A 3 -- -- -- 

Utilization category DC13 

660-690V A 1 -- -- -- 

Rated operational current Ie 60V A 8 -- -- -- 

110V A 1 -- -- -- 

Short circuit protection 

220V A 0.1 -- -- -- 

short-circuit current 1kA, contact welding not accepted 

max. fuse size 

Control Circuit 

Power consumption of coils 

gL (gG) A 25 -- -- -- 

AC operated inrush VA 33-45 90-115 140-165 190-280 

sealed VA 7-10 9-13 13-18 2,5-5 

W 2.6-3 2.7-4 5.4-7 2.5-5 

DC operated inrush W 75 140 200 190-280 

Operation range of coils 

sealed W 2 2 6 2,5-5 

in multiples of control voltage Us AC operated 0.85-1.1 0.85-1.1 0.85-1.1 0.85-1.1 

Switching time 

2) 3) 

At control voltage Us ±10% 

DC operated 0.8-1.1 0.8-1.1 0.8-1.1 0.8-1.1 

AC operated make time ms 8-16 10-25 12-28 20-35 

release time ms 5-13 8-15 8-15 35-50 

arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15 

DC operated make time ms 8-12 10-20 12-23 20-35 

release time ms 8-13 10-15 10-18 35-50 

Cable cross-section 

arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15 

Auxiliary connector solid mm² 0.75-6 -- -- -flexible 

mm² 1-4 -- -- -flexible 

with multicore cable end mm² 0.75-4 -- -- -- 

Magnet coil solid mm² 0.75-2.5 0.75-2.5 0.75-2.5 0.75-2.5 

flexible mm² 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5 

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5 

Clamps per pole 2 2 2 2 

Auxiliary connector solid AWG 18-10 -- -- -flexible 

AWG 18-10 -- -- -- 

Magnet coil solid AWG 14-12 14-12 14-12 14-12 

flexible AWG 18-12 18-12 18-12 18-12 

Clamps per pole 2 2 2 2 

Auxiliary contacts snap on or side mounted Type LA190135 LA190034 LA190100 LA190101 

1 NC 1 NO+1 NC 1 NO 1 NC 

AC15 230V A 6 3 3 3 

AC15 400V A 4 2 2 2 

AC1 690V A 25 10 2 2 

1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request 

2) Total breaking time = release time + arc duration 

3) Values for delay of the release time of the make contact and the make time of the break contact will be increased, if magnet coils are protected against voltage peaks (varistor, RC-unit, 

diode-unit)


W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES – OVERVIEW 

The LSW reversing contactor assemblies can be ordered as follows: 

Sizes 00 to 3 

Fully wired and tested, with mechanical and electrical interlock. For assemblies with AC operation and 50/60 Hz, a dead 

interval of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages ≥ 500 V; a dead interval of 30 ms is recommend for use 

with voltages ≥ 400 V. These dead times do not apply to assemblies with DC operation. 

Sizes 00 to 12 

For overload relays for motor protection, see “Protection Equipment: Thermal overload relays”. The LSW contactor 

assemblies have screw terminals and are suitable for screwing or snapping onto 35 mm standard mounting rails. 

W COMPLETE UNITS UP TO SIZE 3 

The fully wired reversing contactor assemblies are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to 

EN 50274. The contactor assemblies consist of 2 contactors with the same power, with one NC contact in the basic unit. 

The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (NC contact interlock). For motor protection, LST thermal 

overload relays for direct mounting or stand-alone installation must be ordered separately. 

Rated data AC-2 and AC-3 at AC Included in complete unit 

50 Hz 400 V Size Order No. 

Rating Operational Contactor Mechanical Wiring set AC230V/50/60 HZ 

current Ie interlock2) Fully wired and tested 

kW A contactor assemblies 

3 7 00 LSDD07 -- LSZDW0015) LSWD0733 

4 9 LSDD09 LSWD0933 

5.5 12 LSDD12 LSWD1233 

5.5 12 0 LSD012 LSZ0W002 LSZ0W0016) LSW01233 

7.5 17 LSD017 LSW01733 

11 25 LSD025 LSW02533 

15 32 2 LSD232 LSZ0W002 LSZ2W0017) LSW23233 

18.5 40 LSD240 LSW24033 

22 50 LSD250 LSW25033 

30 65 3 LSD365 LSZ0W002 LSZ3W0017) LSW36533 

37 80 LSD380 LSW38033 

45 95 LSD395 LSW39533 

2) Laterally mountable with two auxiliary contacts, one for each contactor. 

5) Wiring set contains: mechanical interlock; connecting clips for 2 contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom. 

6) Wiring set contains: wiring modules on the top and bottom. 

7) Wiring set contains: 2 connecting clips for contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom. 

W COMPONENTS FOR CUSTOMER ASSEMBLY 

For customer assembly of reversing contactor assemblies size 6, 10 and 12, following components are available. 

Contactors, thermal overload relays, the mechanical interlock (as of size 0) and – for momentary-contact operation – 

auxiliary contact blocks for latching must be ordered separately. 


Wiring set for size 6 LSZ6W002 

Wiring set for size 10 LSZEW001 

Wiring set for size 12 LSZ6W001 

Mechanical interlock for size 6, 10, 12 LSZ6W001 

Page 

95

Page 

96 


W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES – FUNCTION 

The operating times of the individual LSD contactors are rated in such a way that no overlapping of the contact making 

and the arcing time between two contactors can occur on reversing, providing they are interlocked by way of their 

auxiliary switches (NC contact interlock) and the mechanical interlock. For assemblies with AC operation and 50/60 Hz, a 

dead interval of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages ≥ 500 V. This dead times does not apply to assemblies 

with DC operation. The operating times of the individual contactors are not affected by the mechanical interlock. 

The following points should be noted: 

Size 00 

For maintained-contact operation: 

Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the electrical interlock. 

For momentary-contact operation: 

Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the electrical interlock; in addition, an auxiliary contact block with 

at least one NO contact for latching is required per contactor. 

Sizes 0 to 3 

For maintained-contact operation: 

The contactors have no auxiliary contact in the basic unit; NC contacts for the electrical interlock are therefore integrated 

in the mechanical interlock that can be mounted on the side of contactor (one contact each for the left and right-hand 

contactors). 

For momentary-contact operation: 

Electrical interlock as for maintained-contact operation; for the purpose of latching an auxiliary contact with an NO 

contact is additionally required for each contactor. This contact can be snapped onto the top of the contactors. 

Alternatively, auxiliary contact blocks mounted on the side can be used; they must be fitted onto the outside of each 

contactor. 


Sizes 00 to 3 

All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surges in the coil. 

As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can either be plugged onto the top of the contactors (size 00) or 

fitted onto the coil terminals on the top or bottom (size 0 to 3). 


The technical specifications are identical to those of the LSD .. contactors. 

The CSA and UL approvals only apply to the complete contactor assemblies and not to the individual parts for customer 

assembly.

W WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES – OVERVIEW 


These LSY contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting are designed for standard applications. 

Note: 

Contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting in special applications such as very heavy starting or wye-delta starting of 

special motors must be customized. Help with designing such special applications is available. 

W COMPLETE UNITS UP TO SIZE 3 

The LSY contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be ordered as follows: 

Sizes 00 to 3: 

Fully wired and tested, with electrical interlock, dead interval of up to 10 s on reversing (size 00 with electrical and 

mechanical interlocks) 

A dead interval of 50 ms on reversing is already integrated in the time relay function. There is also a range of accessories 

(auxiliary contact blocks, surge suppressors, etc.) that must be ordered separately. 

For overload relays for motor protection, see "Thermal Overload Relays” 

The LSY contactor assemblies have screw terminals and are suitable for screwing or snapping onto 35 mm standard mounting 

rails. Fully wired and tested LSY contactor assemblies have one unassigned NO contact which is mounted onto the front of the 

K3 delta contactor. A timing relay is mounted onto the right side of sizes 00, 0 to 2 (7,5 kW, 11 kW and 22 kW). 

Rated data 

at AC 50 HZ 400 V 

Size 

Rating Operational Motor Line/delta Star contactor WYE-Delta timer Order No. 

current Ie current contactor complete 

kW A A 230 V 50/60 Hz 

up to 7.5 17 17 00-00-00 LSDD1213 LSDD0713 LSZD0101 LSYD1733 

up to 15 32 34 0-0-0 LSD02533 LSD01213 LSZD0101 LSY03233 

up to 22 50 43 2-2-0 LSD23233 LSD02533 LSZD0101 LSY25033 

W COMPONENTS FOR CUSTOMER ASSEMBLY 

Installation kits with wiring modules and, if necessary, mechanical connectors are available for contactor assemblies for 

wyedelta starting. Contactors, overload relays, wye-delta timers, auxiliary contacts for electrical interlock – if required also 

feeder terminals, mechanical interlocks (exception: In the case of the wiring set for size 00 contactor assemblies the 

mechanical interlock between the delta contactor and the star contactor is included in the kit) and base plates – must be 

ordered separately. 

The wiring sets for sizes 00 and 0 contain the top and bottom main conducting path connections between the line and delta 

contactors (top) and between the delta and star contactors (bottom). In the case of sizes 2 to 12 only the bottom main conducting 

path connection between the delta and star contactors is included in the wiring module, owing to the 

larger conductor cross-section at the infeed. 


Wiring set for single infeed size 00 1) LSZDY001 

Wiring set for single infeed size 0 2) LSZ0Y001 

Wiring set for single infeed size 2 LSZ2Y004 

Star jumper for size 00 LSZDY002 

Star jumper for size 0 LSZ0Y002 

Star jumper for size 2 LSZ2Y005 

Base plate for size 2/2/0 LSZ2Y001 

Y-D timer - 20s LSZD0101 

Y-D timer - 60s LSZD0102 

1) Wiring set contains: mechanical interlock, 3 connecting clips; wiring modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on the bottom (connection between delta and wyecontactor); 

star jumper. 

2) Wiring set contains: 5 connecting clips; wiring modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on the bottom (connection between delta and wye-contactor); star jumper. 

Page 

97

Page 

98 


W WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES – OVERVIEW 

W MOTOR PROTECTION 

Thermal overload relays can be used for overload protection. The overload relay can be either mounted onto the line 

contactor or separately fitted. It must be set to 0.58 times the rated motor current. 

W FUNCTION 

Wye-delta starting can only be used either if the motor normally operates in a Δ connection or starts softly or if the load 

torque during Y starting is low and does not increase sharply. On the Y step the motors can carry approximately 50 % (class 

KL 16) or 30 % (class KL 10) of their rated torque; The tightening torque is approximately 1/3 of that during direct on-line 

starting. The starting current is approximately 2 to 2.7 times the rated motor current. 

The changeover from Y to Δ must not be effected until the motor has run up to rated speed. Operating mechanisms which 

require this changeover to be performed earlier are unsuitable for wyedelta starting. 

The ratings given in the table are only applicable to motors with a starting current ratio IA ≤ 8.4 x IN and using wye-delta 

timing relay with a dead interval on reversing of approximately 50 ms. 



All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements, varistors or diode assemblies for damping opening surges in the 

coil. As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can either be plugged onto the top of the contactors (size 00) 

or fitted onto the coil terminals on the top or bottom (size 0 to 3). 


The contactors are fitted with varistors as standard. 


Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V. 

For Thermal overload relays see Protection Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays. 

Rating Sizes Rated motor Thermal Setting range Permissible back-up fuses for starters, 

of contactors current overload relay comprising contactor assemblies and overload relays. 

K1-K3-K2 

(the thermal overload Single or double infeed 1) 

relays must be set to Fuse links 

0.58 times the rated LV HRC LV HRC British 

motor current) 

DIAZED Operational class listed Standard 

NEOZED aM fuses Fuses 

gL/gG operational class CLASS BS88 

RK5/L 

Type of coordination Type of Type of 

coordination coordination 

"1" "2" "2" "1" "2" 

kW A Type A A A A A A A 

5.5 00-00-00 12 LSTD0800 5.5 ... 8 35 20 10 30 35 20 

7.5 00-00-00 16 LSTD1000 7 ... 10 35 20 16 40 35 20 

11 0-0-0 22 LST01600 11 ... 16 63 25 20 60 63 25 

15 0-0-0 29 LST02000 14 ... 20 100 35 20 80 100 35 

18.5 0-0-0 35 LST02500 20 ... 25 100 35 20 100 100 35 

22 2-2-0 41 LST23200 22 ... 32 125 63 35 125 125 63 

1) The maximum rated motor current must not be exceeded.

W LSY COMPLETE UNITS, 3 ... 22 kW 


Starter Type LSY.. .. LSYD LSY0 LSY2 

Sizes 00-00-00 0-0-0 2-2-0 

All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the individual LSD contactors and LST thermal overload relays 

Utilization category DC-1 Operating 

cycles 

3 million 

Short-circuit protection without overload relay 

Maximum rated current of the fuse 

Main circuit 

Fuse links, gL/g 

GLV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED 

Single or double infeed 

1) 

- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination „1“ A 35 100 125 

EN 60947-4-1 


Type of coordination „2“ A 20 35 63 

Fuse links, gL/g A 10 

GDIAZED, NEOZED A 62), (short-circuit current Ik ≤1 kA) 

if the auxiliary contact of the Thermal overload relay is connected 

in the contactor coil circuit 

Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10 

A 62), if the auxiliary contact of the Thermal overload relay is connected 

in the contactor coil circuit 

Size of individual contactors K1 line contactor Type LSD ...D12 ...025 ...232 

K3 delta contactor Type LSD ...D12 ...025 ...232 

K2 star contactor Type LSD ...D07 ...012 ...025 

Unassigned auxiliary contacts of the individual contactors 

Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 10 s 

3) 

Rated operational current Ie at 400 V A 17 40 65 

500 V A 11.3 31.2 55.4 

690 V A 9 22.5 53.7 

Rated power for induction motors at at 230 V kW 4.7 12 20.4 

50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 8.2 21 35 

500 V kW 6.9 20.5 38 

690 V kW 7.5 20.4 51 

1000 V kW -- -- -- 

Switching frequency with overload relay h-1 Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 15 s 

15 15 15 


500 V A 11.3 31 44 

690 V A 9 22.5 44 

Rated power for induction motors at at 230 V kW 4.7 9.4 13.8 

50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 8.2 16.3 24 

500 V kW 6.9 20.4 30 

690 V kW 7.5 20.4 42 

1000 V kW -- -- -- 

Switching frequency with overload relay h-1 Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 20 s 

15 15 15 


500 V A 11.3 28 39 

690 V A 9 22.5 39 

Rated power for induction motors at at 230 V kW 4.7 8.5 12.2 

50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 8.2 14.7 21.3 

500 V kW 6.9 18.4 26.7 

690 V kW 7.5 20.4 37 

1000 V kW -- -- -- 

Switching frequency with Thermal overload relay h-1 15 15 15 

1) Short-circuit protection with overload relays, see Thermal Overload Relays. 

2) Up to I k < 0.5 kA; ≤ 260 V. 

Page 

99

Page 

100 

DIMENSIONS 

W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE 

W LSDD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 

45 

5,3 8,6 

51 

 

 

 

 

Screw terminals with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact block and mounted thermal overload relay. 

Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm. 

15,5 

 

 

 

57,5 

118 

 

 

 

5 

67 

67 

99 106 

95 

5) 

5 

3) 

W LSSD CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00 

With surge suppressor. 

Deviating dimensions for auxiliary contactors with Cage Clamp terminals (on request): Height: 60 mm. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

W LSD0 CONTACTORS AND LSSO CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 0 


Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm. 

 

 

 

 

 

2) 

 

 

 

5 

 

35 

4) 

 

 

50 

 

 

 

2) Auxiliary contact block 

3) Surge suppressor 

4) Drilling pattern 

5) Auxiliary contact block 1-pole 



For size 0: 

a = 3 mm at < 240 V 

a = 7 mm at > 240 V 

b = DC 10 mm deeper than AC 

1) Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable 

2) Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front, 

1- and 4-pole 


4) Drilling pattern

W LSD2 CONTACTORS, SIZE 2 

 

 



 

 

 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

For size S2: 

DIMENSIONS 

a = 0 For mm size with 2: varis 

a = 3.5 a = mm 0 mm with with va varistor < 240 V, diode assembly 

a = 17 mm with RC 

a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V 

b = DC 15 mm dee 

1) a = 17 mm with RC element 

Auxiliary switch b 

2) 

Auxiliary b = DC 15 switch mm deeper b than AC 

1) 

(1-, Auxiliary 2- and 4-pole contact block, laterally mountable 

3) 2) Surge Auxiliary suppresso contact block, mountable on the front, 

4) 

Drilling 1- and pattern 4-pole 



 

 

For size S3: 

For size 3: 

a = 0 mm with varistor, diode assembl 

a = 0 mm 

and 

with 

< 

varistor, 

240 V 

diode assembly and < 240 V 

a = a 3.5 = mm 3.5with mm varistor with varistor and > 240 and V > 240 V 

a = a 17 = mm 17 with mm RC with element RC element 

b = b DC = 13 DC mm 13 deeper mm deeper than AC than AC 

1) 1) 

Auxiliary Auxiliary contact switch block, laterally block, mountable laterally moun 

2) 2) Auxiliary Auxiliary contact switch block, mountable block, mountable on the front on 

front (1-, 2- and 4-pole), same dimen 

(1- and 

for 

4-pole), 

versions 

same 

with 

dimensions 

screw or 

for 

Cage 

versions 

Clam 

with 

screw minals or Cage Clamp terminals 

3) Surge 3) suppressor 


5) For mounting on TH 35 standard mounting rail according 

to EN 60715 (15 mm deep) or TH 75 standard mounting 

rail according to EN 60715 

6) Allen screw 4 mm 

 

 

 

Page 

101

Page 

102 

 

DIMENSIONS 


With lateral and front mounted auxiliary contact block box terminals. 

Distance from grounded parts: Lateral: 10 mm, Front: 20 mm 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

W LSDE CONTACTORS, SIZE 10 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

With lateral and front mounted auxiliary contact block box terminals. 


 

 

 

5) 

 

 

 

 

5) 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Drilling pattern 

For size 

k = 120 

For size 6: withd 

1) 

k = 120 mm (minimum 2nd aclearance 

for removing the withdrawable coil) 

1) 2) 

2nd auxiliary contact Auxiliblock, 

lateral 

2) 3) 

Auxiliary contact RC block, el mountable on the front 

4) 3) RC element 3RB2 

5) 

5) Box terminals 3RT19 

(Allen 

6) 

3RT19 

 

 


 

For size 10: 

k = 150 mm (minimum clearance for removing the withdrawable coil) 

1) 2nd auxiliary contact block, lateral 

2) Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front 

3) RC element 

5) Box terminals

W LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZE 12 

With lateral and front mounted auxiliary contact block. 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

W LSDH6 AND LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE 

W LSDH6 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

W LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1) With box terminals for laminated copper bars (on request). 

Terminal cover for touch protection see page 32 LSZHD001. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DIMENSIONS 


For sizes S10 and S12 

 

k = 150 mm (minimum 

For size 12: withdrawable coil) 

k = 150 1) mm 2nd (minimum auxiliary clearance switch for b removing the withdrawable coil) 

1) 2) 

2nd auxiliary Auxiliary contact switch block, block lateral 

2) 3) 

Auxiliary RC contact element block, mountable on the front 

3) 4) 

RC element 3RB20 overload relay 

5) 

Box terminal block (A 

6) 

PLC connection 24 V 

Detail 

A = Contact erosion indication for vacuum interrupter contacts 

 

Detail 

A = Contact erosion indication for vacuum interrupter contacts 

Page 

103

Page 

104 

DIMENSIONS 

W LSR CONTACTORS, 4-POLE 

W LSRD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 

Screw terminals with surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm. 

W LSR0 CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 

For size 00: 

Deviating dimensions for contactors 

with Cage Clamp terminals: 

Height: 60 mm 

Mounting depth with auxiliary contact block: 110 mm 




5) Auxiliary contact block 1-pole 



For size 0: 

a = 3 mm at < 250 V 

and mounting of surge suppressor 

a = 7 mm at > 250 V 

and mounting of surge suppressor 

b = DC 10 mm deeper than AC 

1) Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable (left) 

2) Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front 





For sizes 2 and 3: 

a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V 

a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V 

a = 17 mm with RC element and diode assembly 

b = Size 2: DC 15 mm deeper than AC 

Size 3: DC 13 mm deeper than AC 

1) Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable 

(right or left) 

2) Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front, 

(1- and 4-pole) 



5) For mounting on TH 35 standard mounting rail 

according to EN 60715 (15 mm deep) or for size 3 

also to TH 75 standard mounting rail according to 

EN 60715 


Screw terminals with surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.

W LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 

DIMENSIONS 

Screw terminals for surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm. 

W LSHD...N, LSHD...G AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00 




Screw terminals with diode built-in or additional surge suppressor. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm. 

All types: no further auxiliary contacts or contact blocks can be snapped on. 

LSHD...N: surge suppressor can be inserted 

LSHD...G: with built-in diode 

Deviating dimensions for auxiliary contactors 

with Cage Clamp terminals: 

Height: 60 mm 



Page 

105

Page 

106 

DIMENSIONS 

W LSK CAPACITOR CONTACTORS 

W LSKD CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 

5 

1 

3 

101 

5 

5 

51 

105 

W LSK0 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 

" # 

& 

" & 

& # 

% 

$ 

W LSK3 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 3 

22,5 

70 

22,5 

18 

38 

104 

124 

150 

# 

# 

" " 

167 

130 

$ $ 

5 

7 

8 

! 

51 

90 

5 

116 

35 

170 

183 

50 

$ 

! # 

Drilling 

pattern 

130 

60 

Drilling 

pattern

W LA3K CAPACITY SWITCHING CONTACTORS 

W LA3K18.. 

W LA3K24.., LA3K32.. 

W LA3K50.., LA3K62.., LA3K74.. 

LA3K74.. 

W LA3K90.., LA3K11.. 

DIMENSIONS 

Page 

107

Page 

108 

DIMENSIONS 

W ACCESSORIES FOR LSD CONTACTORS 

W LSZDD003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 00 

3-pole, with terminal 

 

 

 

 

 

W LSZ0D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 0 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

W LSZ00113 MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK 

22,5 84 7 

W LSZ2D002 TERMINAL COVER 

FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 2 

 

 

48 

 

 

 

 

W LSZDD004 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 00 


 

 

 

 

 

W LSZ2D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 0 


 

 

 

W LSZ3D002 TERMINAL COVER 

FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 3

W LSZDD2.., LSZDH5..* 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00 

according to EN 50012 and *EN 50005 

Screw terminals, 1- to 4-pole 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

W LSZ0D1.., LSZ0D1..F* 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 TO 12 

according to EN 50012 and *EN 50005 

Screw terminals, 4-pole 

W LSZ0D711, LSZ3D811* 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 (*3) TO 12 

according to EN 50012, laterally mountable, 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

W ACCESSORIES FOR LSD CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 

W LSZ6W001 MECHANICAL INTERLOCK, SIZES 6 TO 12 

 

 

 

 

DIMENSIONS 

W LSZD0501, LSZD0510 


according to EN 50005 

Screw terminals, cable entry from below, 1-pole 

W LSZ0D0.., LSZ0D9.. 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 TO 12 

according to EN 50012 and EN 50005 


 

 

 

 

 

Page 

109

Page 

110 

DIMENSIONS 

W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 

W LSWD, SIZE 00 

with or without LSZDW002 mechanical interlock link 

 

 

 

 

W LSW0, SIZE 0 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

with LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock 


with LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock 

 

 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

with LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock

W LSY CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES FOR WYE-DELTA STARTING 

W LSYD, SIZES 00 – 00 – 00 

K1 

 

135 

 

 

W LSY0, SIZES 0 – 0 – 0 

 

 

W LSY2, SIZES 2 – 2 – 0 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

105 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DIMENSIONS 

Page 

111

Page 

112 

SCHEMATICS 

W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES 

W LSDD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 

Terminal designations according to EN 50012 

LSDD, LSSD contactors LSDD, LSSD contactors 

1NO included 1NC included 

) 

) ` 

! # ! ! 

6 

" 6 

$ 6 ! 

" 

) 

) ` 

W LSD0, LSD2, LSD3, LSD6, LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZES 0 TO 12 


LSD0, LSS0, LSD2, LSD3 LSD6, LSDE, LSDG 

contactors contactors 

W LSDH6 AND LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14 


4 NO + 4 NC 

) 

) 

 

6 

! 

" 6 

# ! 

$ 6 ! 

! 

" 

! 

! 

" ! 

" " 


LSKD contactor LSK0, LSK3 contactor 

Size 00 Sizes 0, 3 

# ! 

# " 

$ 

$ 

% 

% 

W LSRD CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZE 00 


4NO 

) 

) ` 

 

6 

! 

" 6 

# ! 

$ 6 ! 

% " 

& 6 " 

& ! 

& " 

 

6 

! 

" 6 

# ! 

$ 6 ! 

LSD6, LSDE, LSDG contactors 2NO + 2NC 

with front mounted 4-pole LSZ0D122 auxiliary contact block 

or with lateral 2-pole LSZ0D711 auxiliary contact block 

W LSR0, LSR2, LSR3 CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZES 0 TO 3 


4NO 

) 

) ` 

 

6 

! 

" 6 

# ! 

$ 6 ! 

% " 

& 6 " 

LSZD.... auxiliary contact blocks 

according to EN 50005 and 

EN 50012 can be snapped on 

LSZ0.... auxiliary contact blocks 

according to EN 50005 and 

EN 50012 can be snapped on

SCHEMATICS 


W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 

Terminal designations according to EN 50011 1) 

LSHD067. LSHD068. LSHD069. 

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 1) Positively-driven operation is 

assured likewise for auxiliary 

contact blocks according to EN 

50005 in conjunction with LSH 

auxiliary contactors. 

W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00 

Terminal designations according to EN 50011 (no auxiliary contacts can be snapped on), surge suppressor can be pluged in 

LSHD067N LSHD068N LSHD069N 

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 

W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00 

Terminal designations according to EN 50011 (no auxiliary contacts can be snapped on), diode integrated 

LSHD067G LSHD068G LSHD069G 

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 

W ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NO INCLUDED, SIZE 00 

LSZD auxiliary contact blocks 1 to 4-pole, for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50012 

LSZDD201 LSZDD212 LSZDD213 LSZDD222 

W ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NC INCLUDED 

AND FOR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 


LSZD auxiliary contact blocks, 1-pole 

for snapping onto the front, cable entry from below 

LSZD0510 

1NO 

LSZD0501 

1NC 

LSZD auxiliary contact blocks, 4-pole 

for snapping onto the front 

LSZDH540 

4NO 

LSZDH531 

3NO + 1NC 

LSZDH522 

2NO + 2NC 

Page 

113

Page 

114 

SCHEMATICS 


W ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 TO 12 


LSZ0D0 auxiliary contact blocks, 1-pole 

for snapping onto the front 

LSZ0D010 

1NO 

LSZ0D131 

3NO + 1NC 

! 

" 

! ! 

! " 

" ! 

" " 

LSZ0D140F 

4NO 

LSZ0D711 

1NO + 1NC 

mounted left 

! 

" 

LSZ3D811 

1NO + 1NC 

mounted left 

$ 

$ 

# ! 

# " 

LSZ0D001 

1NC 

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12 

Terminal designations according to EN 50012, for snapping onto the front 

LSZ0D122 

2NO + 2NC 

! 

" 

! 

! 

" ! 

" " 

LSZ0D131F 

3NO + 1NC 

LSZ0D711 

1NO + 1NC 

mounted right 

! 

! 

% 

% 

" ! 

" " 

LSZ3D811 

1NO + 1NC 

mounted right 

& ! 

& " 

LSZ0D113 

1NO + 3NC 

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12 

Terminal designations according to EN 50005, for snapping onto the front 

! 

" 

LSZ0D122F 

2NO + 2NC 

! 

! 

" 

" 

LSZ0D104F 

4NC 

W FIRST LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2-POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12 


W SECOND LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2-POLE, 

ONLY FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 3 TO 12 


LSZ0D9.. auxiliary contact blocks, 1-pole 

early make and delayed, for snapping onto the front 

LSZ0D910 

1NO 

early make 

Diode Diode assembly Varistor RC element 

 

LSZ0D901 

1NC 

delayed 

W SURGE SUPPRESSORS FOR SIZES 00 TO 12 (CODED PLUG-IN DIRECTION)

SCHEMATICS 

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES 

W LSDD, LSSD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 


1NO included 1NC included 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

! # 

" $ 

W LSD0, LSS0, LSD2, LSD3 CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 TO 12 


W LSD6, LSDE, LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZES 6 TO 12 

) 

) 

Terminal designations according to EN 50012, with laterally included auxiliary contact block LSZ0D711 (2 NO + 2 NC). 

Can be extended by LSZ3D811 to 4 NO + 4 NC. 

2NO + 2 NC or 4 NO + 4 NC 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

W LSDH6 AND LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14 


4 NO + 4 NC 

Page 

115

Page 

116 

SCHEMATICS 


W LSRD CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZE 00 


4 NO 

 

 

 

 

 

 

W LSR0, LSR2, LSR3 CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZES 0 TO 3 


4 NO 

) 

) 

! 

" 

) 

# 

$ 

) 

% 

& 

W LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS, SIZES 00 TO 3 

LSKD contactor 

Size 00 

! # ! 

" $ " 

 

 

# 

# 

) 

) 

LSK0, LSK3 contactor 

Sizes 0, 3 

A1 A2 

1 3 5 

43 

44 

2 4 6 

A1 A2 

W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00 


LSHD067. LSHD068. LSHD069. 

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD 

WITH 1 NO CONTACT 

W LSZDD2.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 1 TO 4-POLE, SIZE 00 

for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50012 

LSZDD201 LSZDD212 

1NC 1NO + 2NC 

21 

22 

SCHEMATICS 

LSZDD213 LSZDD222 

1NO + 3NC 2NO + 2NC 

W LSZDH5.., LSZD05.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD 

WITH 1 NC CONTACT OR LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

W LSZDH5.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, SIZE 00 


LSZDH540 

4 NO 

53 63 73 83 

LSZDH531 

3NO + 1NC 

53 61 73 83 

54 64 74 84 

54 62 74 84 

LSZDH522 

2NO + 2NC 

53 61 71 83 

54 62 72 84 

W LSZD05.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 1-POLE, SIZE 00 

for snapping onto the front, cable entry from below, terminal designations according to EN 50005 

LSZD0510 

1 NO 

LSZD0501 

1NC 

# ! # " # # 

21 31 43 

22 32 44 

21 31 41 53 

22 32 42 54 

W LSZ0D1.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, SIZE 0 TO 12 


LSZ0D122 

2NO + 2NC 

13 21 31 41 

14 22 32 44 

LSZ0D131 

3NO + 1NC 

LSZ0D113 

1NO + 3NC 

W LSZ0D1.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, SIZE 0 TO 12 


LSZ0D140F 

4 NO 

13 23 33 43 

14 24 34 44 

13 21 33 43 

14 22 34 44 

LSZ0D131F 

3NO + 1NC 

13 23 33 41 

14 24 34 42 

13 21 31 41 

14 22 32 42 

LSZ0D122F 

2NO + 2NC 

13 23 31 41 

14 24 32 42 

21 31 41 53 

22 32 42 54 

LSZ0D104F 

4NC 

11 21 31 41 

12 22 32 42 

Page 

117

Page 

118 

SCHEMATICS 


W LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 2-POLE, SIZES 0 (3) TO 12 


LSZ0D711 

First laterally mountable, left or right 

1NO + 1NC 

Left Right 

W LSZ0D0.., LSZ0D9.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 1-POLE, SIZES 0 TO 12 

for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50005 or EN 50012 

LSZ0D010 

1 NO 

 

 

LSZ0D001 

1NC 

 

 

LSZ3D811 

Second laterally mountable, left or right (only for sizes 3 to 12) 

1NO + 1NC 

Left Right 

LSZ0D910 

1 NO 

early make 

 

 

LSZ0D901 

1NC 

delayed 

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 

W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, SIZES 0 TO 3 

Terminal designations according to EN 50005. LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock (laterally mountable), integrated in reversing 

contactor assemblies (reversing starters), contains 2 NC contacts for the electrical interlock, one for each contactor. 

2 NC 

111 

112 

121 

122 

1 3 

K1 

2 4 6 

5 1 3 

K2 

K1 

111 

112 

121 

122 

K2 

5 

2 4 6

SCHEMATICS 

W CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 

W MAIN CIRCUIT, SIZE 00 

The LSZDW001 wiring set contains, among other things, 

wiring connectors for connecting the main circuit. 

L1 

L2 

L3 

K1 

L1 

L2 

L3 

K1 

F1 

F2 

F1 

F2 

U V W 

M 

3~ 

U V W 

M 

3~ 

K2 

W MAIN CIRCUIT, SIZES 0 TO 3 

The LSZ.W001 wiring set contains, among other things, the 

wiring modules on the top and bottom for connecting the 

main current paths. 

K2 

S0 Button "OFF" 

S1 Button "Clockwise ON" 

S2 Button "Counterclockwise ON" 

S Button "CW-OFF-CCW" 

K1 Clockwise contactor 

K2 Counterclockwise contactor 

F1 Fuses for main circuit 

F3 Fuses for control circuit 

F2 Thermal overload relays 

W CONTROL CIRCUIT, SIZE 00 

(The terminal designations for the contactors comply with 

EN 50012). The LSZDW001 wiring set contains, among 

other things, the electrical interlock. 

For momentary-contact For maintained-contact 

operation operation 

L1/L+ 

F3 

F2 

S0 

95 

96 

S2 S1 

53 

53 

S1 K1 S2 K2 

54 

54 

K2 

22 

K1 

22 

21 

21 

A1 

A1 

N/L 

K1 

A2 

K2 

A2 

L1/L+ 

F3 

F2 

S0 

95 

96 

S2 S1 

.3 

.3 

S1 K1 S2 K2 

.4 

.4 

K2 112 K1 121 

111 

122 

A1 

A1 

N/L 

K1 

A2 

K2 

A2 

L1/L+ 

S 

N/L 

102 

L1/L+ 

S 

N/L 

F2 

F3 

96 

95 

K2 

22 

K1 

22 

21 21 

K1 

A1 

K2 

A2 

A1 

A2 

W CONTROL CIRCUIT, SIZES 0 TO 3 

(The terminal designations for the contactors comply with 

EN 50005). The LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock contains 

2 NC contact, one for each contactor interlock. 



102 

F2 

F3 

96 

95 

K2 

112 121 

K1 

111 122 

K1 

A1 

K2 

A1 

A2 A2 

Page 

119

Page 

120 

SCHEMATICS 

W CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR LSY WYE-DELTA STARTING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 


L1 

L2 

L3 

3AC 50Hz ...V 

F0 

K1 1 3 5 

2 4 6 

K3 

F1 

U1 

V1 

W1 

U1 

V1 

W1 

M 

3~ 

M 

3~ 

W2 

U2 

V2 

W2 

U2 

V2 

1 3 5 

2 4 6 


L1 

L2 

L3 

3AC 50Hz ...V 

F0 

K1 1 3 5 

2 4 6 

K3 

F1 

U1 

V1 

W1 

U1 

V1 

W1 

M 

3~ 

M 

3~ 

F0 

W2 

U2 

V2 

W2 

U2 

V2 

1 3 5 

2 4 6 

K2 

K2 

W CONTROL CIRCUIT, SIZES 0 TO 12 

 

 

with LSZD0101 Y-Delta timer, laterally mounted (example 

circuits). The contact element K4:17/18 is only closed in the 

wye stage; the contact element is open in the delta stage 

as well as in the de-energized state. S1 (S) is connected 

to clamping point K1:33. 



) + # 0 , + 8 

. 

. 

5 

5 

" 

' $ 

" 

' # 

 

" " 

" ! 

" 

! 

" 

! 

% 

! ! 

 

& & 

! " 

 

! 

" 

 

* Clamping point K1:44 remains unwired in this version 

 

) + # 0 , + 8 

S0 Button "OFF" 

S1 Button "ON" 

S Maintained-contact switch 

K1 Line contactor 

K2 Star contactor 

K3 Delta contactor 

K4 Solid-state, time-delay auxiliary contact block or timing relay 

F0 Fuses 

F1 Thermal overload relays 

. 

. 

5 

" 

' $ 

" 

' # 

 

* 

" " 

" ! 

" 

! 

" 

! 

% 

& 

 

& 

! ! 

 

! " 

 

! 

! 

" 

! 

"

W CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS 


Typical circuit diagram Typical circuit diagram 

Size 00 Sizes 0 and 3 

) 

) 

. 

! 

 

! 

# ! 

6 

" 6 

$ 6 ! 

+ 

! # 

" 

# 

) 

) 

. 

! 

 

! 

# ! 

6 

" 6 

$ 6 ! 


Typical circuit diagram Circuit diagram with 

quick discharge resistors 

+ 

" ! 

" " 

SCHEMATICS 

Page 

121

Page 

122 

BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS 

TOP-TECHNIC 

BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR, AC1, 1-POLE 

TOP-TECHNIC 

BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR, AC1, 2-POLE 

TOP-TECHNIC 

BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR, AC1, 4-POLE

BZ MODULAR 

CONTACTORS 

w CONTENTS 

BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS 





Page 

123

Page 

124 

MODULAR CONTACTORS 

W BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOAD, AC OPERATED 

BZ326471 BZ326453 BZ326463 

DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK TYPE ORDER NO. 

1-POLE, 1 MODULE = 17,5 mm 

Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60Hz R20–10 230 BZ326471 

2-POLE, 1 MODULE = 17,5 mm 





Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 1NO+1NC AC24V 50/60Hz R20–11 24 BZ326421 




Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 2NC AC230V 50/60Hz R20–02 230 BZ326439 



4-POLE, 2 MODULES = 35 mm 












1 Module = 17,5 mm 

Auxiliary contact block 

see next page 







Contactor AC1: 63A/400V, 4NC AC230V 50/60Hz R63–04 230 BZ326469

MODULAR CONTACTORS 

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK FOR BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS 

BZ326470 

W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR 4-POLE, SOLENOID OPERATED, SEALABLE 

BZ326441 


2-pole 

0,5 Module = 8,8 mm 

Max. 1 RH11 for 1 contactor 

DESCRIPTION TYPE ORDER NO. 

Auxiliary contact block AC15: 3A, 1NO+1NC RH11 BZ326470 


Width = 45 mm 

No auxiliary contacts possible 

DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK TYPE ORDER NO. 

Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 4NO AC230V 50/60Hz K1R40 230 BZ326441 

Page 

125

Page 

126 


W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R.. 

acc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1 

Lamp Type Power Current Capacitors Max. lamps per pole at 230V 50Hz and max. 60°C 

W A µF R20.. R25.. R40.. R63.. K1R.. 

Incandescent lamps 60 0,27 - 22 28 58 85 28 

100 0,45 - 13 17 35 51 17 

200 0,91 - 7 8 17 25 8 

300 1,36 - 4 5 11 16 5 

500 2,27 - 3 3 7 10 3 

1000 4,5 - 1 1 3 5 1 

Fluorescent lamps 11 0,16 - 60 75 210 310 60 

uncompensated or serial compensated 18 0,37 2,7 25 30 90 140 25 

24 0,35 2,5 25 30 90 140 25 

36 0,43 3,4 20 25 70 140 20 

58 0,67 5,3 14 17 45 70 14 

65 0,67 5,3 13 16 40 65 13 

85 0,8 - 11 14 35 60 11 

Fluorescent lamps 11 0,07 - 2 x 100 2 x 110 2 x 220 2 x 250 2 x 100 

dual-connection 18 0,11 - 2 x 50 2 x 55 2 x 130 2 x 200 2 x 50 

24 0,14 - 2 x 40 2 x 44 2 x 110 2 x 160 2 x 40 

36 0,22 - 2 x 30 2 x 33 2 x 70 2 x 100 2 x 30 

58 0,35 - 2 x 20 2 x 22 2 x 45 2 x 70 2 x 20 

65 0,35 - 2 x 15 2 x 16 2 x 40 2 x 60 2 x 15 

85 0,47 - 2 x 10 2 x 11 2 x 30 2 x 40 2 x 10 

Fluorescent lamps 11 0,16 2,0 30 30 100 140 30 

parallel compensated 18 0,37 2,0 20 20 70 90 20 

24 0,35 3,0 15 15 55 75 15 

36 0,43 4,5 10 10 38 51 10 

58 0,67 7,0 6 6 25 30 6 

65 0,67 7,0 5 5 24 28 5 

85 0,8 8,0 4 4 18 23 4 

Fluorescent lamps 18 0,09 - 40 40 100 150 40 

with serial electronic 36 0,16 - 20 20 50 75 20 

58 0,25 - 15 15 30 55 15 

2 x 18 0,17 - 2 x 20 2 x 20 2 x 50 2 x 60 2 x 20 

2 x 36 0,32 - 2 x 10 2 x 10 2 x 25 2 x 30 2 x 10 

2 x 58 0,49 - 2 x 7 2 x 7 2 x 15 2 x 20 2 x 7 

Transformers 20 - - 40 52 110 174 40 

for metal halid low voltage lamps 50 - - 20 24 50 80 20 

75 - - 13 16 35 54 13 

100 - - 10 12 27 43 10 

150 - - 7 9 19 29 7 

200 - - 5 5 14 23 5 

300 - - 3 4 9 14 3 

Mercury-vapour lamps 50 0,61 - 16 18 38 55 16 

(high-pressure lamps), uncompensated 80 0,8 - 12 14 28 40 12 

e. g. HQL, HPL 125 1,15 - 8 9 20 28 8 

250 2,15 - 4 5 11 15 4 

400 3,25 - 3 4 7 10 3 

700 5,4 - 1 2 4 6 1 

1000 7,5 - 1 1 3 4 1 

Mercury-vapour lamps 50 0,28 7 7 7 32 46 7 

(high-pressure lamps), compensated 80 0,41 8 5 5 25 35 5 

e. g. HQL, HPL 125 0,65 10 3 3 16 22 3 

250 1,22 18 2 2 8 12 2 

400 1,95 25 1 1 5 7 1 

700 3,45 45 1 1 3 4 1 

1000 4,8 60 - - 2 3 -


W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R.. 


Lamp Type Power Current Capacitors Max. lamps per pole at 230V 50Hz and max. 60°C 

W A µF R20.. R25.. R40.. R63.. K1R.. 

Metal halide lamps 35 0,53 - 22 24 45 65 22 

uncompensated 70 1 - 12 14 24 35 12 

e. g. HQI, HPI, CDM 150 1,8 - 6 8 13 18 6 

250 3 - 4 5 8 12 4 

400 3,5 - 3 4 6 10 3 

1000 9,5 - 1 1 2 4 1 

2000 16,5 - - - 1 2 - 

400V per pole 2000 10,5 - - - 1 2 - 

3500 18 - - - - 1 - 

Metal halide lamps 35 0,25 6 8 8 38 50 8 

compensated 70 0,45 12 4 4 20 28 4 

e. g. HQI, HPI, CDM 150 0,75 20 2 2 12 17 2 

250 1,5 33 1 1 7 10 1 

400 2,1 35 1 1 5 7 1 

1000 5,8 95 - - 2 3 - 

2000 11,5 148 - - 1 1 - 

400V pro Pol 2000 6,6 58 - - 1 2 - 

3500 11,6 100 - - - 1 - 

Metal halide lamps 20 0,1 integrated 9 9 18 20 9 

with serial electronic 35 0,2 integrated 6 6 11 13 6 

(e. g.: PCI) 70 0,36 integrated 5 5 10 12 5 

50-125 x In lamp for 0,6ms 150 0,7 integrated 4 4 8 10 4 

Sodium-vapour lamps 35 1,5 - 7 9 22 30 7 

(low pressure lamps), uncompensated 55 1,5 - 7 9 22 30 7 

90 2,4 - 4 6 13 19 4 

135 3,5 - 3 4 10 13 3 

150 3,3 - 3 4 10 13 3 

180 3,3 - 3 4 10 13 3 

200 3,3 - 3 4 10 13 3 

Sodium-vapour lamps 35 0,31 20 3 3 12 16 3 

(low pressure lamps), compensated 55 0,42 20 2 2 8 14 2 

90 0,63 30 1 1 5 9 1 

135 0,94 45 1 1 3 6 1 

150 1 40 1 1 3 6 1 

180 1,16 40 1 1 2 5 1 

200 1,32 25 - - 2 4 - 

Sodium-vapour lamps 150 1,8 - 5 6 11 22 5 

(high pressure lamps), uncompensated 250 3 - 4 5 7 13 4 

330 3,7 - 3 4 6 10 3 

400 4,7 - 2 2 5 8 2 

1000 10,3 - 1 1 2 4 1 

Sodium-vapour lamps 150 0,83 20 2 2 7 14 2 

(high pressure lamps), compensated 250 1,5 33 1 1 4 8 1 

330 2 40 1 1 3 6 1 

400 2,4 48 1 1 2 5 1 

1000 6,3 106 - - 1 2 - 

Sodium-vapour lamps 20 0,1 integrated 9 9 18 20 9 

(high pressure lamps) with serial electronic 35 0,2 integrated 6 6 11 13 6 

(e. g.: PCI) 70 0,36 integrated 5 5 10 12 5 

50-125 x In lamp for 0,6ms 150 0,7 integrated 4 4 8 10 4 

Page 

127

Page 

128 


W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R.., RH11 


Contactor 

Main contacts 

Type R20.. R25.. R40.. R63.. K1R.. RH11 

Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 440 2) 440 2) 440 2) 440 2) 690 1) 440 2) 

Rated operation voltage Ue V AC 250 440 440 440 690 440 

Frequency of operations AC1, AC3 1/h 300 300 600 600 600 600 

Mechanical life S x 10 6 1 1 1 1 5 1 


Rated operational current Ie (= Ith) open at 60°C A 20 25 40 63 20 - 

Contact life S x 106 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,2 - 

Minimum switch voltage V/mA 24/100 24/100 24/100 24/100 24/100 1 7/5 

Short time current 10s-current A 72 72 216 240 96 - 

Power loss per pole at Ie/AC1 W 2 2 3 7 1 0,5 


Switching of three-phase motors, rated operational current Ie A - 9 27 30 12 - 

Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220V kW - 2,2 7,5 8 3 - 

50-60Hz 230-240V kW 1,1 4) 2,5 8 8,5 3 - 

380-415V kW - 4 12,5 15 4 - 

Contact life S x 106 - 0,15 0,15 0,15 0,9 - 


AC operated inrush VA 7-9 14-18 33-45 33-45 3-3,5 - 

sealed VA 2,2-4,2 4,4-8,4 7-10 7-10 3-3,5 - 

W 0,8-1,6 1,6-3,2 2,6-3 2,6-3 3-3,5 - 

Operation range of coils in multiples of control voltage Us (-40 to +40°C) 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 - 


Coordination-type "1" 

according to IEC 947-4-1, max. fuse size 

Cable cross-sections 

gL (gG) A 35 35 63 80 40 - 

Main connector solid or stranded mm² 1,5-10 1,5-10 2,5-25 2,5-25 0,5-2,5 3) 0,5-2,5 3) 

flexible mm² 1,5-6 1,5-6 2,5-16 2,5-16 0,5-2,5 3) 0,5-2,5 3) 

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 1,5-6 1,5-6 2,5-16 2,5-16 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 

Clamps per pole 1 1 1 1 2 2 

Magnetic coil solid or stranded mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,5-2,5 3) - 

flexible mm² 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 3) - 

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 - 

Clamps per pole 

Auxiliary Contacts 

1 1 1 1 2 - 

Rated insulation voltage Ui 1) V AC - - - - - 440 2) 

Thermal rated current Ith 40°C A - - - - - 10 

Ambient temperature 60°C A - - - - - 6 


Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A - - - - - 3 

380-415V A - - - - - 2 


440V A - - - - - 1,6 

Rated operational current Ie 24-60V A - - - - - 2 

110V A - - - - - 0,4 

per pole 


220V A - - - - - 0,1 

Short-circuit current 1kA, contact welding not accepted 

max. fuse size gL (gG) A - - - - - 10 

Switching time 

At control voltage Us ±10% make time ms 7-16 9-15 11-15 11-15 15-19 - 

release time ms 6-12 4-8 6-13 6-13 8-25 - 

arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15 - 

1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. 3) Maximum cable cross-section with prepared conductor 

2) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to III, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 4kV. 4) AC5b motor 2-pole 230V 1,1kW

DIMENSIONS 

W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R40, RH11 

W 1 MODULE W 2 MODULES 

W 3 MODULES 

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK 

BZ326470 

W MODULAR CONTACTOR, SOLENOID OPERATED 

BZ326441 

Page 

129

Page 

130 

SCHEMATICS 

W CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR 

BZ TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R40 

W 1-POLE, 1 MODULE 

R20-10 230 

W 2-POLE, 1 MODULE 

R20-20 24 

R20-20 230 

W 4-POLE, 2 MODULES 

R25-40 24 

R25-40 230 


R40-30 230 


W CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK 

W 2-POLE, 0,5 MODULE 

RH11 

R20-11 24 

R20-11 230 

R25-31 24 

R25-31 230 

R40-40 24 

R40-40 230 R40-22 230 

R63-40 24 

R63-40 230 R63-31 230 

W 4-POLE 

K1R40 230 

(13) 

(14) 

R20-02 230 

R25-02 24 

R25-02 230 

R25-13 24 

R25-13 230 

R63-04 230 

(21) 

(22) 

R25-04 24 

(21) 

(22)

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR 

BZ TYPES R.., K1R40 AND AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK RH11 

W TYPES R20.., R25.. – 1-POLE, 1 MODULE 

1NO 

1 

2 

A1 

A2 

W TYPES R25.. – 4-POLE, 2 MODULES 

4NO 

1 3 

2 4 

W TYPE K1R40 – 4-POLE, (WIDTH = 45 mm) 

4NO 

A1 

A2 

5 7 

6 8 

W TYPES R40.. – 3-POLE, 3 MODULES 

3NO 

1 3 

2 4 

1 3 

2 4 

A1 

A2 

A1 

A2 

 

 

5 

6 

5 7 

6 8 

3NO + 1NC 

1 3 

2 4 

5 R7 

6 R8 

1 3 

2 4 

1NO + 3NC 

A1 

A2 

1 R3 

2 R4 

W TYPES R40.., R63.. – 4-POLE, 3 MODULES 

A1 

A2 

A1 

A2 

5 R7 

6 R8 

R5 R7 

R6 R8 

43 

31 

32 

44 

SCHEMATICS 

W TYPES R20.., R25.. – 2-POLE, 1 MODULE 

2NO 

1 3 

A1 

A2 

2 4 

4NC 

R1 R3 

R2 R4 

1 3 

2 4 

R5 R7 

R6 R8 

A1 

A2 

W TYPE RH11 – 2-POLE, 0,5 MODULE 

1NO + 1NC 

R5 R7 

R6 R8 

1NO + 1NC 

1 R3 

A1 

A2 

2 R4 

4NO 3NO + 1NC 2NO + 2NC 4NC 

A1 

A2 

R1 R3 

R2 R4 

2NC 

R1 R3 

A1 

A2 

R2 R4 

A1 

A2 

R5 R7 

R6 R8 

Page 

131

Page 

132 

LA MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

TOP-TECHNIC 

LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 

FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3, 3POLE 

TOP-TECHNIC 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS 

FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 

TOP-TECHNIC 

SURGE SUPPRESSORS 

FOR MINIATUR CONTACTORS

LA MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

LA MINIATUR POWER AND 

AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

w CONTENTS 





Page 

133

Page 

134 

MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

W LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE 

LA100910 


TYPE LA1 

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO AC24V 50/60Hz LA100910 

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NC 1) AC24V 50/60Hz LA100920 

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO AC220-240V 50Hz LA100913 

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NC 1) AC220-240V 50Hz LA100923 

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LA100915 

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NC 1) DC24V LA100925 

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO DC24V 2) LA10091B 

1) Additional auxiliary contact blocks for contactors with 1NC included: only LA190153, 154, 155, 156 to be used (for miniatur auxiliary contactors) 

2) With integrated coil-protection: diode + Z-diode 

W LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 4POLE 

LA100943 


TYPE LA1 

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V AC220-240V 50Hz LA100943 

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V DC24V 2) LA10094B 

2) With integrated coil-protection: diode + Z-diode 

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 

LA190150 


Auxiliary contact blocks for LA1 miniatur power contactors with 1 NO included. 

For LA1 miniatur power contactors with 1 NC included, see next page. 


Auxiliary contact block 2NO+2NC DIN EN 50012 LA190150 

Auxiliary contact block 1NO+1NC DIN EN 50012 LA190151


W LA1 MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 – 4POLE 

LA100770 


TYPE LA1 

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 4NO AC24V 50/60Hz LA100770 

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 4NO AC220-240V 50Hz LA100773 

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 4NO AC380-400V 50Hz LA100774 

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC24V 50/60Hz LA100780 

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC220-240V 50Hz LA100783 

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC24V 50/60Hz LA100790 

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC220-240V 50Hz LA100793 

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC24V LA100795 

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

LA190156 




Auxiliary contact block 2NC DIN EN 50011 LA190155 

Auxiliary contact block 4NO DIN EN 50011 LA190156 

LA190194 


Auxiliary contact blocks for all LA1 miniatur auxiliary contactors and also for LA1 miniatur 

power contactors with 1 NC included. 

W SURGE SUPPRESSOR FOR MINIATUR CONTACTORS 


RC-Unit 250-415VAC 50Hz LA190194 

Page 

135

Page 

136 


W MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1009.. 

acc. to IEC 947-4-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1 

Contactor 

Main contacts 

Type LA1009.. 

Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 690 1) 

Making capacity Ieff at Ue = 690V AC A 165 

Breaking capacity Ieff 400V AC A 100 

cosϕ = 0,65 500V AC A 90 

690V AC A 80 


Switching of resistive load 

Rated operational current Ie (= Ith) open at 40°C A 20 

Rated operational power of three-phase motors 230V kW 7,9 

50-60Hz, cosϕ = 1 240V kW 8,3 

400V kW 13,8 

415V kW 14,3 

Minimum cross-section of conductor at load with Ie (= Ith) 

Utilization category AC2 and AC3 

Switching of three-phase motors 

mm² 2,5 

Rated operational current Ie 220V A 12 

open and enclosed 230V A 11,5 

240V A 11 

380-400V A 9 

415-440V A 8 

500V A 7 

660-690V A 5 

Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220-240V kW 3 

50-60Hz 380-400V kW 4 

500-690V kW 4 


Switching of squirrel cage motors, inching 


open and enclosed 230V A 11,5 

240V A 11 

380-400V A 9 

415-440V A 8 

500V A 7 

660-690V A 5 

Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220-240V kW 3 

50-60Hz 380-400V kW 4 

500-690V kW 4 

1) Suitable at 690V for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request.

W MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1009.. 


Contactor 


Type LA1009.. 

Switching of resistive load 1 pole 24V A 20 

Time constant L/R ≤1ms 60V A 20 


220V A 0,6 

3 poles in series 24V A 20 

60V A 20 

110V A 20 

Utilization category DC3 and DC5 

220V A 16 

Switching of of shunt motors 1 pole 24V A 20 

and series motors 60V A 5 

Time constant L/R ≤1ms 110V A 1 

Rated operational current Ie 220V A 0,15 

3 poles in series 24V A 20 

60V A 20 

110V A 20 

Maximum ambient temperature 

220V A 2 

Operation open °C -40 to +60 (+90) 

enclosed °C -40 to +40 

with thermal overload relay open °C -25 to +60 

enclosed °C -25 to +40 

Storage °C -50 to +90 

Short circuit protection for contactors without thermal overload relay 

Coordination-type "1" according to IEC 947-4-1 

Contact welding without hazard of persons, max. fuse size 

Coordination-type "2" according to IEC 947-4-1 

gL (gG) A 40 

Light contact welding accepted, max. fuse size 

Contact welding not accepted 

gL (gG) A 25 

max. fuse size gL (gG) A 10 

For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible 

backup fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse size. 

Cable cross-sections for contactors without thermal overload relay 

Main connector solid or stranded mm² 0,5-2,5 

flexible mm² 0,5-2,5 

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-1,5 

Clamps per pole 2 

Frequency of operations 

solid or stranded AWG 18-14 

without load 1/h 10000 

Contactors without thermal overload relay AC3, Ie 1/h 600 

AC4, Ie 1/h 120 

DC3, Ie 1/h 600 

Mechanical life AC operated S x 106 5 

DC operated S x 106 Short time current 

15 

10s-current 

Power loss 

A 96 

per pole 

Resistance to shock according to IEC 68-2-27 

Shock time 20ms sine-wave 

at Ie/AC3 400V W 0,15 

AC operated NO g 5 

NC g 5 

DC operated NO g 8 

NC g 6 

1) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x Us and with reduced rated current Ie /AC1according to Ie /AC3 


Page 

137

Page 

138 


W MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LA1009.., LA1007.. 


Contactor 

Auxiliary contacts 

Type LA 100 7.. / LA 100 9.. AC operated LA 100 7.. / LA 100 9.. DC operated 

Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 690 1) 690 1) 

Thermal rated current Ith to 690V 

Ambient temperature 40°C A 10 10 

Power loss 

60°C A 6 6 

per pole 


at Ith W 0,5 0,5 

Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A 3 3 

380-415V A 2 2 

440V A 1,6 1,6 

500V A 1,2 1,2 


660-690V A 0,6 0,6 

Rated operational current Ie 60V A 2 2 

110V A 0,4 0,4 

Maximum ambient temperature 

220V A 0,1 0,1 

Operation open °C -40 to +60 (+90) 3) -40 to +60 (+90) 3) 

enclosed °C -40 to +40 -40 to +40 

Storage 


Short-circuit current 1kA 

°C -50 to +90 -50 to +90 

Contact welding not accepted, max. fuse size gL (gG) A 20 20 

For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible 

control fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse size. 


AC operated inrush VA 25 - 

sealed VA 4-5 - 

W 1,2 - 

DC operated inrush W - 2,5 

Operation range of coils 

sealed W - 2,5 

in multiples of control voltage Us 

4) 5) 

Switching time at control voltage Us ±10% 

0,85-1,1 0,8-1,1 

AC operated make time ms 15-25 - 

release time ms 8-25 - 

arc duration ms 10-15 - 

DC operated make time ms - 15-19 

release time ms - 8-25 

Cable cross-sections 

arc duration ms - 10-15 

all connectors solid mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 

flexible mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 

Clamps per pole 2 2 

solid or stranded AWG 18-14 18-14 

1) Suitable at 690V for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request. 

3) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x Us and with reduced thermal rated current Ith to Ie /AC15. 

4) Summary switching time = release time + arc duration 

5) Release time of NC make time of NO increase when suppressor units for voltage peak protection are used (Varistor, RC-units, Diode units).

W MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

W CONTACTORS 

LA1007.., LA1009.. 

AC and DC operated 

LA 100 9.. 

LA 101 2.. 

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK 

LA19015. 

DIMENSIONS 

W ACCESSORY FOR MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

W RC UNIT 

LA190194 

Page 

139

Page 

140 

SCHEMATICS 

W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 

W 3-POLE 

terminal designations according to EN 50012 

LA10091. 

1 NO included 

LA10092. 

1 NC included 

W 4-POLE 


LA10094. 

4 NO 

W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

W 4-POLE 


LA10077. 

4 NO 

LA10078. 

3 NO + 1 NC 

LA10079. 

2 NO + 2 NC 

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR CONTACTORS 

W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WITH 1 NO INCLUDED 


LA190150 

2 NO + 2 NC 

LA100153 

2 NO + 2 NC 

LA190151 

1 NO + 1 NC 

W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WITH 1 NC INCLUDED AND ALL AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 


LA190154 

1 NO + 1 NC 

LA100155 

2 NC 

LA190156 

4 NO

21 31 43 53 

22 32 44 54 

SCHEMATICS 

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 

W 3-POLE 


LA10091. 

1 NO included 

 

 

 

 

13 23 ! 33 # 43 ) A1 

14 24 " 34 $ 44 ) A2 

LA10092. 

1 NC included 

! # 

" $ 

13 21 ! 33 # 43 ) A1 

14 22 " 34 $ 44 ) A2 

) 

) 

W 4-POLE 


LA10094. 

4 NO 

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

W 4-POLE 


LA10077. 

4 NO 

LA10078. 

3 NO + 1 NC 

21 33 

22 34 

! # 

" $ 

LA10079. 

2 NO + 2 NC 

13 21 ! 31 # 43 ) A1 

14 22 " 32 $ 44 ) A2 

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS 

FOR MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WITH 1 NO INCLUDED 

front mounted auxiliary contact blocks, terminal designations according to EN 50012 

LA190150 

2 NO + 2 NC 

51 61 73 83 

52 62 74 84 

LA190151 

1 NO + 1 NC 

W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WITH 1 NC INCLUDED AND ALL AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

front mounted auxiliary contact blocks, terminal designations according to EN 50005 

LA190153 

2 NO + 2 NC 

LA190154 

1 NO + 1 NC 

51 63 

52 64 

LA190155 

2 NC 

7 

8 

51 61 

52 62 

) 

) 

LA190156 

4 NO 

53 63 73 83 

54 64 74 84 

Page 

141

Page 

142 

ALEA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 

TOP-TECHNIC 

LSTD 

TOP-TECHNIC 

LST2 

TOP-TECHNIC 

LST0 

TOP-TECHNIC 

LST3

ALEA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 

ALEA THERMAL 

OVERLOAD RELAYS 

w CONTENTS 

OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. Page 144 




ACCESSORIES........................................................................................................ Page 156 

CHARAKTERISTIC CURVES.............................................................................. Page 157 



Page 

143

Page 

144 

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 

W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS – OVERVIEW 

LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3 

FEATURES 

GENERAL DATA 

BENEFITS LST 

SIZES Are coordinated with the dimensions, connections and technical 

characteristics of the other devices in the ALEA modular system 

Permit the mounting of slim and compact load feeders in widths 

of 45 mm (S00), 45 mm (S0), 55 mm (S2), 70 mm (S3) 

Simplify configuration 

S00 ... S3 

SEAMLESS CURRENT RANGE Allows easy and consistent configuration with one series of 

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 

overload relays (for small to large loads) 0.11 ... 100 A 

TRIPPING IN THE EVENT OF OVERLOAD Provides optimum inverse-time delayed protection of 

loads against excessive temperature rises due to overload 

✓ 

TRIPPING IN THE EVENT OF PHASE UNBALANCE Provides optimum inverse-time delayed protection of loads 

against excessive temperature rises due to phase unbalance 

✓ 

TRIPPING IN THE EVENT OF PHASE FAILURE Minimizes heating of induction motors during phase failure ✓ 

PROTECTION OF SINGLE-PHASE LOADS 

FEATURES 

Enables the protection of single-phase loads ✓ 

RESET FUNCTION Allows manual or automatic resetting of the relay ✓ 

REMOTE RESET FUNCTION (ON REQUEST) Allows the remote resetting of the relay ✓(by means of separate module) 

TEST FUNCTION FOR AUXILIARY CONTACTS Allows easy checking of the function and wiring ✓ 

STATUS DISPLAYS Displays the current operating state ✓ 

LARGE CURRENT ADJUSTMENT BUTTON Makes it easier to set the relay exactly to the correct current value ✓ 

INTEGRATED AUXILIARY CONTACTS (1 NO + 1 NC) Allows the load to be switched off if necessary ✓ 

DESIGN OF LOAD FEEDERS 

Can be used to signal output ✓ 

SHORT-CIRCUIT STRENGTH UP TO 100 KA AT 690 V Provides optimum protection of the loads and operating personnel ✓ 

(in conjunction with the corresponding fuses in the event of short-circuits due to insulation faults or faulty 

or the corresponding motor starter protector) switching operations 

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL MATCHING Simplifies configuration ✓ 

TO CONTACTORS LSSD, LSDD, LSD0, LSD2, LSD3 Reduces wiring outlay and costs ✓ 

Enables stand-alone installation as well as space-saving direct mounting ✓ 

SPRING-LOADED TERMINAL CONNECTION Enables fast and maintenance-free connections S00 

SYSTEM FOR MAIN CIRCUIT (ON REQUEST) Permits vibration-resistant connections 

SPRING-LOADED TERMINAL CONNECTION Enables fast and maintenance-free connections 

SYSTEM FOR AUXILIARY CIRCUITS (ON REQUEST) 

OTHER FEATURES 

Permits vibration-resistant connections 

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Allows the use of the relays at high temperatures without derating ✓ 

Prevents premature tripping ✓ 

Allows compact installation of the control cabinet without distance 

between the devices/load feeders 

✓ 

Simplifies configuration ✓ 

Enables space to be saved in the control cabinet ✓ 

VERY HIGH LONG-TERM STABILITY Provides safe protection for the loads even after years of use in 

severe operating conditions 

✓

W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS – OVERVIEW 

LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3 

TYPE LSTD / LST0 / LST2 / LST3 

APPLICATIONS 

System protection ✓1) Motor protection ✓ 

Alternating current, 3-phase ✓ 

Alternating current, 1-phase ✓ 

DC current ✓ 

SIZE OF CONTACTOR 

RATED OPERATIONAL CURRENT In 

S00, S0, S2, S3 

SIZE S00 up to 12A 




RATED OPERATIONAL VOLTAGE Ue 690/1000 VAC2) RATED FREQUENCY 50/60 Hz 

TRIP CLASS Class 10 

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELEASE 0.11 ... 0.16A 

up to 80 ... 100A 

RATING FOR INDUCTION MOTOR AT 400 V AC 0.04 KW up to 45 KW 

ACCESSORIES FOR SIZES S00 S0 S2 S3 

Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 

Mechanical RESET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 

Cable release for RESET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 

Electrical remote RESET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 

Terminal covers -- -- ✓ ✓ 

Sealable covers for setting knobs integrated integrated integrated integrated 

1) The units are responsible in the main circuit for overload protection of the assigned electrical loads 

(e.g. motors), feeder cable and other switching and protection devices in the respective load feeder. 

2) Size 3 up to 1000 V AC. 

✓ Has this function or can use this accessory. 

-- Does not have this function or cannot use this accessory. 


Page 

145

Page 

146 


W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS – GENERAL INFORMATIONS 

OVERLOAD RELAYS CURRENT MEASUREMENT CURRENT RANGE CONTACTORS (TYPE, SIZE, RATING IN kW) 

LSSD+LSDD/S00 LSS0+LSD0/S0 LSD2/S2 LSD3/S3 

TYPE TYPE A 3/4/5.5 5.5/7.5/11 15/18.5/22 30/37/45 

LSTD integrated 0.11 … 12 ✓ -- -- -- 

LST0 integrated 1.8 … 25 -- ✓ -- -- 

LST2 integrated 5.5 … 50 -- -- ✓ -- 

LST3 integrated 18 … 100 -- -- -- ✓ 

W CONNECTION 

Connection of the auxiliary circuit 

Connection type Screw terminals 

Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 

Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 

Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors 

- solid mm 2 1 × (0.5 ... 4), 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5) 

- finely stranded without end sleeve mm 2 – 

- finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5) 

- stranded mm 2 – 

- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (20 ... 14) 

Connection type Spring-loaded terminals on request for size 00 


- solid mm 2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5) 

- finely stranded without end sleeve mm 2 -- 

- finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5) 

- stranded mm 2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5) 

- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (24 ... 16)



1 

2 

5 

7 

W SCHRACK INFO 

The LST thermal overload relays up to 100 A have been designed for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with 

normal starting against excessive temperature rises due to overload or phase failure. An overload or phase failure results 

in an increase of the motor current beyond the set rated motor current. Via heating elements, this current rise heats up 

the bimetal strips inside the device which then bend and as a result trigger the auxiliary contacts by means of a tripping 

mechanism. The auxiliary contacts then switch off the load by means of a contactor. The break time depends on the ratio 

between the tripping current and set current Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping characteristic. The 

"tripped" status is signaled by means of a switch position indicator. Resetting takes place either manually or auto matically 

after the recovery time has elapsed. The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmental guidelines and 

contain environmentally friendly and reusable materials. 

W DESIGN AND FUNCTION 

3 

4 

6 

(1) Connection for mounting onto contactors: Optimally adapted in electrical, mechanical and design terms to the 

contactors and soft starters, these connecting pins can be used for direct mounting of the overload relays. Standalone 

installation is possible as an alternative (in some cases in conjunction with a stand-alone installation module). 

(2) Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET and RESET button: With this switch you can choose between manual 

and automatic RESET. A device set to manual RESET can be reset locally by pressing the RESET button. A remote 

RESET is possible using the RESET modules (accessories), which are independent of size (on request). 

(3) Switch position indicator and TEST function of the wiring: Indicates a trip and enables the wiring test. 

(4) Motor current setting: Setting the device to the rated motor current is easy with the large rotary knob. 

(5) STOP button: If the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact is opened. This switches off the contactor downstream. 

The NC contact is closed again when the button is released. 

(6) Transparent, sealable cover Secures the motor current setting, TEST function and the selector switch for manual/ 

automatic RESET against adjustment. 

(7) Supply terminals: The generously sized terminals permit connection of two conductors with different cross-sections 

for the main and auxiliary circuits. The auxiliary circuit can be connected with screw terminals and alternatively with 

spring-loaded terminals (on request). 

W DEVICE CONCEPT 

The LST thermal overload relays are compact devices, i.e. current measurement and the evaluation unit are integrated in a 

single enclosure. 

W MOUNTING OPTIONS 

The LST thermal overload relays can be mounted directly onto the LSS/LSD contactors (exception: size 00 with Cage Clamp 

connection can only be installed as a stand-alone installation). The devices can also be installed as stand-alone installations 

with the corresponding terminal brackets. 

W CONNECTION METHOD 

All sizes of the LST thermal overload relays with screw terminal can be connected to the auxiliary and main current paths. 

Rails can be connected to the main conductor connections of size 3 overload relays if the box terminals are removed. 

As an alternative, the devices are also available with Cage Clamp terminals. The auxiliary conductor connections of these 

devices, and for size 00 the main conductor connections as well, are fitted with Cage Clamp terminals (on request). 

W OVERLOAD RELAYS IN CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES FOR WYE-DELTA STARTING 

When overload relays are used in combination with contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting it must be noted that only 

0.58 times the motor current flows through the line contactor. An overload relay mounted onto the line contactor must 

be set to 0.58 times the motor current. An assignment of the LST thermal overload relays to the line contactors of our 

LSY contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be found under "Power and Auxiliary Contactors". 

W OPERATION WITH FREQUENCY CONVERTER 

The LST thermal overload relays are suitable for operation with frequency converters. Depending on the frequency of the 

converter, a higher current than the motor current must be used in some cases due to eddy-currents and skin effects. 

Page 

147

Page 

148 



W BASIC FUNCTIONS 

The LST thermal overload relays are designed for: 

Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from overloading 

Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from phase failure 

W CONTROL CIRCUIT 

The LST thermal overload relays do not require an additional supply voltage for operation. 

W SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION 

Fuses or motor starter protectors must be used for short-circuit protection. 

W TRIP CLASSES 

The LST thermal overload relays are available for normal starting conditions with trip class 10. 

W PHASE FAILURE PROTECTION 

The LST thermal overload relays are fitted with phase failure sensitivity in order to minimize temperature rises of the load 

in the case of a phase failure during single-phase operation. 

W SETTING 

The LST thermal overload relays are set to the rated motor current by means of a rotary knob. The scale of the rotary 

knob is shown in ampere. 

W MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC RESET 

Automatic and manual reset is selected by pressing and turning the blue button (RESET button). If the button is set to 

manual reset, the overload relay can be reset directly by pressing the RESET button. Resetting is possible in combination 

with mechanical and electrical reset options from the range of accessories. If the blue button is set to automatic RESET, 

the relay is reset automatically. The time between tripping and resetting is determined by the recovery time. 

W RECOVERY TIME 

After tripping due to overload, the LST thermal overload relays require some time until the bimetal strips have cooled 

down. The device can only be reset after the bimetal strips have cooled down. This time (recovery time) depends on the 

tripping characteristics and strength of the tripping current. The recovery time allows the load to cool down after 

tripping due to overload. 

W TEST FUNCTION 

The TEST slide can be used to check whether the operational LST thermal overload relay is working properly. Actuating 

the slide simulates tripping of the relay. During this simulation the NC contact (95-96) is opened and the NO contact (97- 

98) is closed. This tests whether the auxiliary circuit has been correctly connected to the overload relay. If the LST 

thermal overload relay has been set to automatic RESET, the overload relay is automatically reset when the TEST slide is 

released. The relay must be reset with the RESET button if it has been set to manual RESET. 

W STOP FUNCTION 

If the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact is opened. This switches off the contactor downstream and thus the load. 

The load is switched on again when the STOP button is released. 

W DISPLAY OF THE OPERATING STATE 

The respective operating state of the LST thermal overload relay is displayed by means of the position of the marking on 

the TEST function/switch position indicator slide. After tripping due to overload or phase failure, the marking on the slide 

is to left on the "O" mark, otherwise it is on the "I" mark. 

W AUXILIARY CONTACTS 

The LST thermal overload relays are fitted with an NO contact for the "tripped" signal, and an NC contact for 

disconnecting the contactor.

W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SIZE 00 

LSTD.... 



THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY SIZE 00 

Thermal overload relay 0,11...0,16 A LSTD0016 








Thermal overload relay 0,7...1 A LSTD0100 










Thermal overload relay 7...10 A LSTD1000 

Thermal overload relay 9...12 A LSTD1200 


LST0.... 



Thermal overload relay 1,8...2,5 A LST00250 


Thermal overload relay 2,8...4 A LST00400 




Thermal overload relay 7...10 A LST01000 

Thermal overload relay 9...12,5 A LST01250 





Page 

149

Page 

150 

LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 


LST2.... 





Thermal overload relay 9...12,5 A LST21250 









LST3.... 



Overload relay thermal 18...25 A LST32500 








W HOLDER FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY 

LSZ.... 

DESCRIPTION SIZE ORDER NO. 

Holder for stand-alone installation 00 LSZDTE01 

Holder for stand-alone installation 0 LSZ0TE01 

Holder for stand-alone installation 2 LSZ2TE01 

Holder for stand-alone installation 3 LSZ3TE01


W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LSTD, LST0, LST2, LST3 

Type LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3 

Size 00 0 2 3 

Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm 

General data 

Trips in the event of Overload and phase failure 

Trip class acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 CLASS 10 

Phase failure sensitivity Yes 

Overload warning No 

Reset and recovery 

Reset options after tripping Manual, automatic and remote RESET 1) 

Recovery time 

- for automatic RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic 

- for manual RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic 

- for remote RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic 

Features 

Display of operating state on device Yes, by means of TEST function/switch position indicator slide 

TEST function Yes 

RESET button Yes 

STOP button Yes 

Ambient temperature 

Storage/transport °C -55 ... +80 

Operation °C -20 ... +70 

Temperature compensation °C Up to 60 

Permissible rated current at 

- temperature inside control cabinet 60 °C % 100 (over +60 °C current reduction is not required) 

- temperature inside control cabinet 70 °C % 87 

Repeat terminals 

Coil repeat terminal Yes Not required 

Auxiliary contact repeat terminal Yes Not required 

Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP20 IP20 2) 

Touch protection acc. to IEC 61140 Finger-safe 

Shock resistance with sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 8/10 

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Interference immunity 

Conductor-related interference 

- burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 (corresponds to degree of severity 3) kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays 

- surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 (corresponds to degree of severity 3) kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays 

Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2 kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays 

(corresponds to degree of severity 3) 

Field-related interference acc. to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays 

(corresponds to degree of severity 3) 

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Emitted interference EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays 

Resistance to extreme climates – Air humidity % 100 

Dimensions See dimensional drawings 

Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 2000; above this, please enquire 

Mounting position The diagrams show the permissible mounting positions for direct mounting and 

stand-alone installation. For installation in the hatched area, a setting correction 

of 10 % must be implemented. 

Stand-alone installation: 

Contactor + overload relay: 

Type of mounting Direct mounting 3)/ Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with 

stand-alone stand alone holder 

installation with 

stand alone holder 

1) Remote RESET in combination with the corresponding accessories (on request). 

2) Terminal compartment: degree of protection IP00. 

3) The LSTD overload relay with Cage Clamp terminals can only be installed as a stand-alone installation. 

! # 

 

1 A N 

! # 

! # 

 

1 A N 

" # " # 

1 A N 1 A N 

! # 

' ' 

5 * ! $ " 

 

# # 

5 * ! $ ! 

Page 

151

Page 

152 




Size 00 0 2 3 

Width 

Main circuit 

45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm 

Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 690 1000 

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 8 

Rated operational voltage Ue Type of current 

V 690 1000 

Direct current Yes 

Alternating current Yes, frequency range up to 400 Hz 

Set current A 0.11 ... 0.16 to 1.8 ... 2.5 to 5.5 ... 8 to 18 ... 25 to 

9 ... 12 20 ... 25 40 ... 50 80 ... 100 

Power loss per unit (max.) 


With fuse without contactor 

W 3.9 ... 6.6 3.9 ... 6 6 ... 9 10 ... 16.5 

With fuse and contactor See "Technical specifications" (short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors 

for motor feeders) 

Safe isolation between main and auxiliary 

conducting path acc. to IEC 60947-1 

Connection for main circuit 

V 500 690 

Connection type Screw terminals with box terminal 

Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw 4mm 

Tightening torque 

Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 

1 or 2 conductors 

Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 3 ... 4.5 4 ... 6 

- solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2) 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2) 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16) 

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2) 

Max. 2 x (1 ... 4) 2) Max. 2 x (2.5 ... 102) ) 

- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2) 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2) 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 35) 

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2) 1 x (0.75 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 50) 

- stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2) 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2) 2 x (0.75 ... 25) 2 x (10 ... 50) 

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2) 1 x (0.75 ... 35) 1 x (10 ... 70) 

Max. 2 x (1 ... 4) 2) Max. 2 x (2.5 ... 10) 2) 

- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (18 ... 3) 2 x (10 ... 1/0) 

1 x (18 ... 1) 1 x (10 ... 2/0) 

- ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 

Busbar connection Busbar connection1) Terminal screw -- M6 x 20 

Tightening torque 

Conductor cross-sections (min./max.) 

Nm -- 4 ... 6 

- finely stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 2 x 70 

- stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 3 x 70 

- AWG cables, solid or stranded, with cable lug AWG -- 2/0 

- with connecting bar (max. width) mm -- 12 

Connection type 


Cage Clamp terminals on request 

- solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) -- 

- finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) -- 

- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) -- 

- stranded mm2 -- -- 

- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 14) -- 

1) The box terminal is removable. Rail and cable lug connections are possible if the box terminal is removed. 

2) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.




Size 00 0 2 3 

Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm 


Number of NO contacts 1 

Number of NC contacts 1 

Auxiliary contacts – assignment 1 NO for the signal "tripped", 

1 NC for disconnecting the contactor 

Rated insulation voltage U i V 690 

(degree of pollution 3) 

Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kV 6 

Contact rating of the auxiliary contacts 

NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15, 

rated operational current I e at Ue: 

- 24 V A 4 

- 120 V A 4 

- 125 V A 4 

- 230 V A 3 

- 400 V A 2 

- 600 V A 0.6 

- 690 V A 0.5 

NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15, 

rated operational current Ie at Ue: 

- 24 V A 3 

- 120 V A 3 

- 125 V A 3 

- 230 V A 2 

- 400 V A 1 

- 600 V A 0.6 

- 690 V A 0.5 

NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13, 

rated operational current Ie at Ue: 

- 24 V A 1 

- 60 V A 1) 

- 110 V A 0.22 

- 125 V A 0.22 

- 220 V A 0.11 

Continuous thermal current Ith A 6 2) 

Contact reliability (suitability for PLC control; 17 V, 5 mA) Yes 


With fuse 

- gL/gG operational class A 6 

- Quick A 10 

With miniature circuit breaker (C characteristic) A 6 

Safe isolation between main and auxiliary conducting V 415 

path acc. to IEC 60947-1 

CSA, UL, UR rated data 

Auxiliary circuit – switching capacity B600, R300 

Connection of the auxiliary circuit 



Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 


- solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 3) , 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 3) 

- finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- 

- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 3), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 3) 

- stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 3), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 3) 

- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 

Connection type Cage Clamp terminals on request 


- solid 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) 

- finely stranded without end sleeve 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) 

- finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) 

- stranded -- 

- AWG cables, solid or stranded 2 x (24 ... 14) 

1) On request. 

2) Up to I k ≤ 0.5 kA; ≤ 260 V. 

3) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. 

If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply. 

Page 

153

Page 

154 


W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 00 AND SIZE 0 

Short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors for motor feeders 

With short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 V AC Permissible short-circuit protection fuse for motor starters 

comprising overload relay and contactor, type of coordination "2" 1) 

Overload relays 3 kW LSSD/LSDD07 4 kW LSSD/LSDD09 5.5 kW LSSD/LSDD12 UL-listed fuses 

Setting range I e max = 7 A I e max = 9 A I e max = 12 A RK5 

(at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) 

A gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 A 

Size 00 

0.11 ... 0.16 0.5 -- -- 0.5 -- – 0.5 – – 1 

0.14 ... 0.2 1 -- -- 1 -- – 1 – – 1 

0.18 ... 0.25 1 -- -- 1 -- – 1 – – 1 

0.22 ... 0.32 1.6 -- 2 1.6 -- 2 1.6 – 2 1 

0.28 ... 0.4 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 – 2 1.6 

0.35 ... 0.5 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 – 2 2 

0.45 ... 0.63 2 -- 4 2 -- 4 2 – 4 2.5 

0.55 ... 0.8 4 -- 4 4 -- 4 4 – 4 3 

0.7 ... 1 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 – 6 4 

0.9 ... 1.25 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 – 6 5 

1.1 ... 1.6 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 – 10 6 

1.4 ... 2 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 – 10 8 

1.8 ... 2.5 10 -- 10 10 -- 10 10 – 10 10 

2.2 ... 3.2 10 -- 16 10 -- 16 10 – 16 12 

2.8 ... 4 16 -- 16 16 -- 16 16 – 16 16 

3.5 ... 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 

4.5 ... 6.3 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 25 

5.5 ... 8 20 10 20 20 10 20 20 10 20 30 

7 ... 10 -- -- -- 20 16 20 20 16 20 40 

9 ... 12 -- -- -- -- -- -- 20 16 25 45 

Overload relays 5.5 kW LSS0/LSD012 7.5 kW LSS0/LSD017 5.5 kW LSS0/LSD025 UL-listed fuses 




Size 0 

1.8 ... 2.5 10 – 10 10 – 10 10 – 10 10 

2.2 ... 3.2 10 – 16 10 – 16 10 – 16 12 

2.8 ... 4 16 – 16 16 – 16 16 – 16 16 

3.5 ... 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 

4.5 ... 6.3 20 6 25 20 6 25 20 6 25 25 

5.5 ... 8 25 10 25/32 2) 25 10 25/32 2) 25 10 32 30 

7 ... 10 25 16 25/32 2) 25 16 25/32 2) 32 16 35 40 

9 ... 12.5 25 20 25/32 2) 25 20 25/32 2) 35 20 35 45 

11 ... 16 25 20 25/32 2) 25 20 25/32 2) 35 20 35 60 

14 ... 20 -- -- -- 25 20 25/32 2) 35 20 35 80 

17 ... 22 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 20 35 80 

20 ... 25 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 20 35 100 

1) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices according to IEC60947-4-1: 

The contactor or starter must not endanger persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit. 

Type of coordination 1: The contactor or the starter may be non-operational after every short-circuit release. 

Type of coordination 2: The contactor or the starter must be operational after a short-circuit release (without replacement of parts). 

Welding of the contacts is permissible however. 

2) At max. 415 V.

W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 2 AND SIZE 3 


Short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors for motor feeders 

With short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 V AC Permissible short-circuit protection fuse for motor starters 

comprising overload relay and contactor, type of coordination "2" 1) 

Overload relays 3 kW LSD232 4 kW LSD240 5.5 kW LSD250 UL-listed fuses 




Size 2 

5.5 ... 8 25 10 25 25 10 25 25 10 25 30 

7 ... 10 32 16 32 32 16 32 32 16 32 40 

9 ... 12.5 35 16 35 35 16 35 35 16 35 50 

11 ... 16 40 20 40 40 20 40 40 20 40 60 

14 ... 20 50 25 50 50 25 50 50 25 50 80 

18 ... 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 100 

22 ... 32 63 35 63 63 35 63 80 35 80 125 

28 ... 40 63 50 63 63 50 63 80 50 80 150 

36 ... 45 -- -- -- 63 50 80 80 50 80 175 

40 ... 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- 80 50 80 200 

Overload relays 30 kW LSD365 37 kW LSD380 45 kW LSD395 UL-listed fuses 




Size 3 

18 ... 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 100 

22 ... 32 80 35 80 80 35 80 80 35 80 125 

28 ... 40 80 50 80 80 50 80 80 50 80 150 

36 ... 50 125 50 125 125 50 125 125 50 125 200 

45 ... 63 125 63 125 160 63 160 160 63 160 250 

57 ... 75 -- -- -- 160 80 160 160 80 160 300 

70 ... 90 -- -- -- -- -- -- 160 100 160 350 

80 ... 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 160 100 160 350 

1) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices according to IEC60947-4-1: 

The contactor or starter must not endanger persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit. 

Type of coordination 1: The contactor or the starter may be non-operational after every short-circuit release. 

Type of coordination 2: The contactor or the starter must be operational after a short-circuit release (without replacement of parts). 

Welding of the contacts is permissible however. 

Page 

155

Page 

156 

ACCESSORIES 

W ACCESSORIES FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 

W OVERVIEW 

The following accessories are available for the LST thermal overload relays: 

For the four overload relay sizes 00 to 3 one terminal bracket each for stand-alone installation 

One mechanical RESET module for all sizes on request 

One cable release for resetting devices which are difficult to access (for all sizes) on request 

Terminal covers 


Stand-alone holder 

Type LSZDTE01 LSZ0TE01 LSZ2TE01 LSZ3TE01 

For overload relays LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3 

Mounting type For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rails, size S3 also for TH 75 standard mounting rails 

Connection for main circuit 

Connection type Screw terminals Screw terminals with box terminal 

Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw 4 mm 

Conductor cross-section (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors 

- solid mm 2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x (1 ... 6), 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16) 

max. 1 x (... 4) max. 1 x (... 10) 

- finely stranded without end sleeve mm 2 -- 

- finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5) 1 x (1 ... 6) 2 x (0.75 ... 16), 2 x (2.5 ... 35), 

1 x (0.75 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 50) 

- stranded mm 2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x (1 ... 6), 2 x (0.75 ... 25), 2 x (10 ... 50), 

max. 1 x (... 4) max. 1 x (... 10) 1 x (0.75 ... 35) 1 x (10 ... 70) 

- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 1 x (18 ... 14) 1 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (18 ... 3), 2 x (10 ... 1/0), 

1 x (18 ... 1) 1 x (10 ... 2/0) 

- ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm -- -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)

Tripping time 

10 000 

100 

min 

60 

40 

10 

5 

2 

1 

5000 

s 

2000 

1000 

500 

200 

100 

50 

20 

10 

5 

2 

1 

2-pole 

loading 

3-pole 

loading 

0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 x 1 n 

15 

A 

Current 

CHARACTERISTIC CURVES 

W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS – CHARACTERISTIC CURVES 

The tripping characteristics show the relationship between the tripping time and tripping current as multiples of the set 

current Ie and are given for symmetrical three-pole and two-pole loads from the cold state. The smallest current used for 

tripping is called the minimum tripping current. According to IEC 60947-4-1, this current must be within specified limits. 

The limits of the minimum tripping current for the LST thermal overload relays for symmetrical three-pole loads are 

between 105 % and 120 % of the set current. The tripping characteristic starts with the minimum tripping current and 

continues with higher tripping currents based on the characteristics of the so-called trip classes (CLASS 10, CLASS 20 

etc.). The trip classes describe time intervals within which the overload relays have to trip with 7.2 times the set current 

Ie from the cold state for symmetrical three-pole loads. 

The tripping characteristic for a three-pole LST thermal overload relay (see characteristic curve for symmetrical three-pole 

loads from the cold state) only applies if all three bimetal strips are simultaneously loaded with the same current. If only 

two bimetal strips are heated due to a phase failure, these two strips alone must generate the necessary force to trigger 

the tripping mechanism which would result in a longer tripping time or require a higher current. If these higher currents 

are applied over a longer period, they usually cause damage to the load. To avoid damage, the LST thermal overload 

relays are fitted with phase failure sensitivity which ensures faster tripping in accordance with the characteristic curve for 

double-pole loads from the cold state by means of a suitable mechanical mechanism. Compared with a cold load, a load 

at operating temperature obviously has a lower temperature reserve. This is taken into account by the LST thermal overload 

relays by reducing the tripping time to about 25 % when loaded with the set current Ie for an extended period. 

The tripping times are as follows for: 

Trip class Tripping times 

CLASS 10A 2 s ... 10 s 

CLASS 10 4 s ... 10 s 

CLASS 20 6 s ... 20 s 

CLASS 30 9 s ... 30 s 

W SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF A CHARACTERISTIC CURVE 

The characteristic curves for the individual LST thermal overload relays can be requested from Technical Assistance. 

Page 

157

Page 

158 

DIMENSIONS 

W SCREW CONNECTION 

Lateral distance to grounded components: at least 6 mm. 

W LSTD, SIZE 00 

118 

61 

15,5 

with mechanical RESET (on request) 

45 

10 

24 

41 47 

W LST2, SIZE 2 

# 

# " 

# # 

5 33 

49 

68 

min. 28...max. 130 

max. 185 

148 

46 

32 

17,4 

3) 

12 12 

2) 1) 

5) 

max. 8 

with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation 

# # " " 

# # 

# 

6) 

1) Mechanical RESET. 

2) Cable release (400 or 600 mm long, mounting on the front or laterally on the holder). 

3) Holder for RESET. 

4) Pushbutton. 

5) Extension plunger. 

6) For mounting on TH35-7,5 standard mounting rail according to EN 60715. 

' # 

# 

" 

6) 

# 

" 

# 


& 

# 

4) 




$ 

# 


# $ % 

6) 


# 

# % 

# 

# 

% 

7) 

7) For mounting on TH35-15 or TH75 standard mounting rail acc. to EN 607 15 

# ' 

% ' 

! 

#

! # ! 

6 

" 6 $ 6 ! 

6 - 5 6 

4 - 5 - 6 

5 6 2 

1 3 5 

2 

4 6 

' # 

' $ 

' % 

' & ) " 

! # ! 

6 

" 6 $ 6 ! 

1 3 5 

2 

6 - 5 6 

4 - 5 - 6 

5 6 2 

4 6 

' # 

' $ 

' % 

' & 

SCHEMATICS 

W INTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 

W LSTD 

W PROTECTION OF DC MOTORS 

W LST0, LST2, LST3 

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 

W LSTD 

with LSZDTE01 

1L1 3L2 5L3 

95 96 97 98 A2 

2T1 4T2 6T3 14/22 

W LST0, LST2, LST3 

W 1-POLE W 2-POLE 

+ + – 

with LST0TE01, LST2TE01, LST3TE01 

1L1 3L2 5L3 

95 96 97 98 

2T1 4T2 6T3 

Page 

159

Page 

160 

LA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 


TOP-TECHNIC 

LA1 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY 

WITH HAND RESET

LA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 


LA THERMAL OVERLOAD 

RELAYS FOR MINIATUR 

POWER CONTACTORS 

w CONTENTS 





Page 

161

Page 

162 



W LA1 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS WITH HAND RESET 

LA100300 



Thermal overload relays 0,12 – 0,18A LA100300 











Thermal overload relays 8,0 – 11A LA100311 

Thermal overload relays 10 – 14A LA100312


W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 

W RELAYS WITH STANDARD TRIPPING CHARACTERISTIC FOR LA1003.. 

Setting Range: 

Tripping time depending on the multiple of the current setting from cold condition (tolerance ±20% of the tripping time) 

Type Setting Range IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN 

A 3 4 5 6 7,2 8 

LA1003.. s s s s s s 

0,12 – 0,18 18,5 10,4 7,2 5,5 4,3 3,6 

0,18 – 0,27 16,7 9,8 6,5 5 4,1 3,5 

0,27 – 0,4 19,4 12,1 8,2 5,9 4,9 4,2 

0,4 – 0,6 18,7 11,2 8 6 4,9 4,1 

0,6 – 0,9 19,7 11,6 8,1 6,1 4,9 4,2 

0,8 – 1,2 22,9 13,6 10 7,3 6 5,2 

1,2 – 1,8 22,2 13,2 9,2 7,6 5,8 5,3 

1,8 – 2,7 23 13,7 9,3 7,6 5,7 5,1 

2,7 – 4 24 14,4 9,9 7,8 5,9 5,1 

4 – 6 24,7 13,8 9,9 7,3 5,6 4,8 

6 – 9 22 13,4 8 5,7 4,1 3,5 

8 – 11 17,4 9,2 5,9 4,1 2,9 2,3 

10 – 14 26,4 12,9 7,6 5,2 3,5 2,8 

W EXAMPLE OF SELECTION FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY LA1003.. 

Technical data of a motor 

PN = 1,5 kW IN = 3,6 A IA/IN = 5 tE time = 14 s 

LA100302 (2,7- 4 A) 

Tripping time at 5 x IN = 9,9 s 

9,9 s + 20% tolerance = 11,9 s < tE Motor = 8 s 

The device is suitable. 

W FUSES FOR LA1003.. 

Max. fuse size according to coordination-type Fuse UL SCCR 3) 

Type Setting Range "2" 1) "1" 1) 

DOL YΔ quick slow, gL (gG) slow, gL (gG) aM 

A A A A A A A kA 

LA1003.. 0,12 – 0,18 – 0,5 2) 0,5 2) 25 - 15 5 

0,18 – 0,27 – 1,0 2) 1,0 2) 25 - 15 5 

0,27 – 0,4 – 2 2 25 - 15 5 

0,4 – 0,6 – 2 2 25 - 15 5 

0,6 – 0,9 – 4 4 25 - 15 5 

0,8 – 1,2 – 4 4 25 2 15 5 

1,2 – 1,8 – 6 6 25 2 15 5 

1,8 – 2,7 – 10 10 25 4 15 5 

2,7 – 4 – 16 10 25 4 15 5 

4 – 6 7,5 – 10,5 20 16 25 6 15 5 

6 – 9 10,5 – 15,5 35 25 35 10 25 5 

8 – 11 14 – 19 35 25 35 16 30 5 

10 – 14 18 – 24 50 35 63 16 40 5 

1) Coordination-type according to IEC 947-4-1: 

"2": Light contact welding accepted. Thermal overload relay must not be damaged. 

"1": Welding of contactor and damage of the thermal overload relay allowed. 

2) Miniature fuse 

Page 

163

Page 

164 


W TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS FOR LA1003.. 

Detailed tripping times for each range see table on page before. 

with three-phase load 

Tripping time 

min. s 

F. L. C. multiplication factor 

Average value of typical 

tolerance curves from 

cold condition 

Proceeding from service 

condition the times 

decrease to 20-30% of 

the characteristic values 

with two-pole load 

Tripping time 

min. s 

K 

Typical tolerance curve 

from cold condition 

Proceeding from service 

condition the times 

decrease to 70-80% of 

the characteristic values 

K =Imax /Ie 

Imax = max. phase current 

Ie = max. scale value


W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 


Contactor 

Main contacts 

Type LA1003.. 

Rated insulation voltage Ui 1) Permissible ambient temperature 

V ~ 690 

operation open °C -25 to +60 

storage 

Trip class 

°C -50 to +70 

according to IEC 947-4-1 

Cable cross-section 

10A 

Main connector solid or stranded mm² 0,75-6+0,75-2,5 2) 

flexible mm² 0,75-4+0,5-2,5 2) 

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-2,5+0,5-1,5 

Cables per clamp number 1+1 

Auxiliary connector solid mm² 0,75-2,5 2) 

flexible mm² 0,5-2,5 2) 

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-1,5 

Cables per clamp 

Auxiliary contacts 

Rated insulation voltage Ui 

number 2 

1) 

same potential V ~ 690 

different potential 


V ~ 440 


230V A 3 

400V A 2 


690V A 0,6 

Rated operational current Ie 24V A 1,2 

110V A 0,15 

220V A 0,1 

Short circuit protection (without welding 1kA) 

highest fuse rating gL (gG) A 6 

Power loss per current path (max.) 

minimum setting value W 1,1 

maximum setting value W 2,3 

1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to III, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 4kV (at 440V), 6kV (at 690V). Data for other conditions on request. 

2) Maximum cable cross-section with prepared conductor. 

W TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION 

In case of higher ambient temperature use the following formula: 

(Ambient temperature - 20) x 0,125 = correction factor in % of the full load motor current 

Example: 

Ambient temperature 70°C, full load motor current 7A 

(70 - 20) x 0,125 = 6,25% 

Setting value: 7A + 6,25% = 7,44A 

Page 

165

Page 

166 

-12 

DIMENSIONS 

W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1003.. 

W LA1003.. (+ CONTACTOR LA1009..) 

Contacor 

Thermal overload relay

SCHEMATICS 

W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1 


W LA1003.. 

manual reset 

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1 


W LA1003.. 

Page 

167

Page 

168 

ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A 

TOP-TECHNIC 

BESD.... 

TOP-TECHNIC 

BES2.... 

TOP-TECHNIC 

BES0.... 

TOP-TECHNIC 

BES3....

ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A 

ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION 

SWITCHES UP TO 100A 

w CONTENTS 

OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. Page 170 




ACCESSORIES........................................................................................................ Page 188 

CHARAKTERISTIC CURVES.............................................................................. Page 190 



Page 

169

Page 

170 

MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A 

W BES – OVERVIEW 

BESD.... BES0.... BES2.... BES3.... 

TYPE BESD / BES0 / BES2 / BES3 

APPLICATIONS 

System protection ✓1) Motor protection ✓ 

SIZE 

RATED CURRENT In 

S00, S0, S2, S3 





RATED OPERATIONAL VOLTAGE Ue ACCORDING TO IEC 690 VAC2) RATED FREQUENCY 50/60 Hz 

TRIP CLASS Class 10 

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELEASE 0.11 ... 0.16A 

up to 80 ... 100A 

ELECTRONIC TRIP UNITS A multiple of the rated current 13 Times 

SHORT-CIRCUIT BREAKING CAPACITY Icu at 400 VAC 50/100 kA 

ACCESSORIES FOR SIZES S00 S0 S2 S3 

Auxiliary switches ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 

Signaling switches -- ✓ ✓ ✓ 

Undervoltage releases ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 

Shunt trip units ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 

Insulated three-phase busbar systems ✓ ✓ ✓ -- 

Busbar adapters ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 

Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms -- ✓ ✓ ✓ 

Link modules ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 

Enclosures for surface mounting ✓ ✓ ✓ -- 

Infeed terminal ✓ ✓ ✓ -- 

1) For symmetrical loading of the three phases. 

2) 500 V AC with moulded-plastic enclosure. 

✓ Has this function or can use this accessory. 

-- Does not have this function or cannot use this accessory.



The following illustrations show our BES motor protection switches with the accessories which can be mounted for the 

various sizes. 

W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZE 00, WITH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES 

W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 0, 2 OR 3, WITH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES 

Mountable accessories for all sizes 00 ... 3: 

1. Transverse auxiliary switch 

2. Lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts 

4. Shunt release 

5. Undervoltage release 

Mountable accessories for sizes: 

6.1. Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts 00 

6.2. Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts 0 ... 3 

7. Signaling switch 0 ... 3 

Page 

171

Page 

172 



W MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES 

Mounting location and function 

The BES motor protection switches have three main contact elements. In order to achieve maximum flexibility, auxiliary 

switches, signaling switches, auxiliary trip units and door coupling rotary operating mechanism can be supplied separately. 

These components can be fitted as required on the motor protection switches without using tools. 

W AUXILIARY SWITCHES, SIGNALING SWITCHES, SHUNT TRIPS AND UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES 

Front side 

Notes: 

A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts 

with auxiliary switches can be attached 

to each motor protection switch. 

Left-hand side 

Notes: 

A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts 

with auxiliary switches can be attached 

to each motor protection switch. 

Auxiliary switches (2 contacts) 

and signaling switches can be 

mounted separately or together. 

Right-hand side 

Notes: 

One auxiliary trip unit can be 

mounted per motor protection switch. 

Transverse auxiliary switches 

1 NO + 1 NC / 2 NO 

Lateral auxiliary switches 

(2 contacts) 

1 NO + 1 NC / 2 NO 

Signaling switches 

for sizes 0, 2 and 3 

Tripping 1 NO + 1 NC 

Short-circuit 1 NO + 1 NC 

Shunt trip units 

or 

Undervoltage releases 

An auxiliary switch block can be inserted transversely on the front. 

The overall width of the motor protection switches remains unchanged. 

One of the two auxiliary switches can be mounted laterally for each motor protection 

switches The contacts of the auxiliary switch close and open together with the main 

contacts of the motor protection switches. The overall width of the lateral 

auxiliary switch with 2 contacts is 9 mm. 

One signaling switch can be mounted at the side of each motor protection switches 

with a rotary operating mechanism. The signaling switch has two contact systems. 

One contact system always signals tripping irrespective of whether this was caused 

by a short-circuit, an overload or an auxiliary trip unit. The other contact system only 

switches in the event of a short-circuit. There is no signaling as a result of switching 

off with the handle. In order to be able to switch on the motor protection switches 

again after a short-circuit, the signaling switch must be reset manually after the error 

cause has been eliminated. The overall width of the signaling switch is 18 mm. 

For remote-controlled tripping of the motor protection switches. The release coil 

should only be energized for short periods (see schematics). 

Trips the motor protection switches when the voltage is interrupted and prevents the 

motor from being restarted accidentally when the voltage is restored. Used for 

remote-controlled tripping of the motor protection switches. Particularly suitable for 

EMERGENCY-STOP disconnection by way of the corresponding EMERGENCY-STOP 

pushbutton according to DIN VDE 0113. 

W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING) SIZE 0 TO 3 


Motor protection switches with a rotary operating mechanism can be mounted in a control 

cabinet and operated externally by means of a door-coupling rotary operating mechanism. 

When the cabinet door with motor protection switches is closed, the operating mechanism 

is coupled. When the motor protection switches closes, the coupling is locked which 

prevents the door from being opened unintentionally. This interlock can be defeated by the 

maintenance personnel. In the open position, the rotary operating mechanism can be 

secured against reclosing with up to 3 padlocks. Inadvertent opening of the door is not 

possible in this case either. 

W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS 


ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISM 

Rotary operating (door coupling) 0/2/3 BEZ00010 

Rotary operating, emergency stop (door coupling) 0/2/3 BEZ00011


W BES – GENERAL INFORMATIONS 


BES motor protection switches are compact, current limiting motor protection switches which are 

optimized for load feeders. The motor protection switches are used for switching and protecting 

induction motors of up to 45 kW at 400 V AC and for other loads with rated currents of up to 100A. 

W TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION 

The motor protection switches are available in four sizes: 

Size 00 – width 45 mm, max. rated current 12 A, at 400 V AC suitable for induction motors up to 5.5 kW. 

Size 0 – width 45 mm, max. rated current 25 A, at 400 V AC suitable for induction motors up to 11 kW. 



W NOTE 

Technical specifications by green backgrounds. The devices with Cage Clamp terminals are on request. 

W SCREW TERMINALS 

BES motor protection switches of sizes 00 and 0 are fitted with terminals with captive screws and clamping pieces, allowing 

the connection of 2 conductors with different cross-sections. The box terminals of the size 2 and 3 motor protection switches 

also enable 2 conductors with different cross-sections to be connected. With the exception of size 3 motor protection switches 

which are equipped with 4 mm Allen screws, all terminal screws are tightened with a Pozidriv screwdriver size 2. The box 

terminals of the size 3 motor protection switches can be removed in order to connect conductors with cable lugs or connecting 

bars. A terminal cover is available as touch protection and to ensure that the required clearances and creepage distances are 

maintained if the box terminals are removed. 

W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZE 00 WITH CAGE CLAMP TERMINALS (ON REQUEST) 


As an alternative to screw terminals, size 00 motor protection switches are also available with Cage Clamp terminals. This 

screwless connection method, already familiar from terminal blocks, clamps the conductors using a spring-loaded terminal and 

is shock-proof and vibration-proof. Motor protection switches with Cage Clamp terminals allow independent connection of two 

conductors per terminal. 

W MOUNTING 

The motor protection switches are snap-fitted an a 35 mm standard mounting rail to EN 60715. A standard mounting rail with 

a height of 15 mm is required for size S3 motor protection switches. A 75 mm standard mounting rail can be used as an 

alternative for size 3. Size 2 and 3 motor protection switches can also be screwed directly onto a base plate. 

Page 

173

Page 

174 



When mounting the motor protection switches, the following clearances must be maintained to grounded or live parts and 

to cable ducts made of molded plastic. 

Motor protectio n switches / 

circuit breakers 

Type Size U e 

V 

BESD 

BES0 

BES2 

BES3 

Distance to grounded or 

live parts acc. to 

IEC 60947-2 

Y 

X 

mm mm 

S00 up to 690 20 70 

Z 

mm 

9 

S0 up to 500 30 90 9 

up to 690 50 90 30 

S2 up to 690 50 140 30 

S3 up to 240 

up to 440 

up to 500 

up to 690 

50 

70 

110 

150 

167 

167 

167 

167 

10 

10 

10 

30 

Z Z 

1L1 3L2 5L3 

2T1 4T2 6T3 

1L1 3L2 5L3 

2T1 4T2 6T3 

W INSTALLATION GUIDELINES, FUNCTION AND CONFIGURATION 

W TRIP UNITS 

BES motor protection switches are equipped with inverse-time delayed overload release based on the bimetal principle and 

with instantaneous electronic trip units (electromagnetic shortcircuit releases). The overload releases can be adjusted in 

accordance with the load current. The electronic trip units are permanently set to a value 13 times the rated current and thus 

enable trouble-free starting of motors. The scale cover can be sealed to prevent unauthorized adjustments to the set current. 

W TRIP CLASSES 

The trip classes of thermally delayed trip units are based on the tripping time (tA) at 7.2 times the set current in cold state 

(excerpt from IEC 60947-4): 

CLASS 10: 4 s < tA < 10 s 

The motor protection switches must trip within this time! 

W OPERATING MECHANISMS 

Size 00 motor protection switches are actuated by a rocker operating mechanism and size 0, 2 and 3 motor protection 

switches by a rotary operating mechanism. If the motor protection switches trips, the rotary operating mechanism switches to 

the tripped position to indicate this. Before the motor protection switches is reclosed, the rotary operating mechanism must be 

reset manually to the 0 position. Only then can the motor protection switches be set again to the I position. In the case of motor 

protection switches with rotary operating mechanisms, an electrical signal can be output by a signaling switch to indicate that 

the motor starter protector has tripped. All operating mechanisms can be locked in the 0 position with a padlock (shackle 

diameter 3.5 mm to 4.5 mm). The motor protection switches isolating function complies with IEC 60947-2. 

W PREVENTION OF UNINTENDED TRIPPING 

In order to prevent premature tripping due to the integrated phase failure sensitivity, motor protection switches should always 

be connected to ensure current flows through all three main current paths. 

W SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION 

If a short-circuit occurs, the short-circuit releases of BES motor protection switches isolate the faulty load feeder from the 

network and thus prevent further damage. Motor protection switches with a short-circuit breaking capacity of 50 kA or 100 kA 

are virtually short-circuit resistant at a voltage of 400 V AC, since higher short-circuit currents are not to be expected in 

practice. 

W MOTOR PROTECTION 

The tripping characteristics of BES motor protection switches are designed mainly to protect induction motors. The motor protection 

switches are therefore also referred to as motor circuit breakers. The rated current In of the motor to be protected is set on the 

setting scale. Factory setting of the short-circuit release is 13 times the rated current of the motor protection switches. This permits 

trouble-free starting and ensures that the motor is properly protected. The phase failure sensitivity of the motor protection switches 

ensures that it is tripped in time in the event of a phase failure and overcurrents that occur as a result in the other phases. Motor 

protection switches with thermal overload releases are normally designed in accordance with trip class 10. 

BES 

BES 

Y 

Y 

BES 

X



W SYSTEM PROTECTION 

The BES motor protection switches for motor protection are also suitable for plant protection. In order to prevent premature 

tripping due to phase failure sensitivity, the three conducting paths must always be uniformly loaded. The conducting paths 

must be connected in series the case of single-phase loads. 

W SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION FOR STARTER COMBINATIONS 

The BES motor protection switches for starter combinations in sizes 0, 2 and 3 provide short-circuit protection with the 

help of a contactor and overload relay combination. Like the motor protection switches for motor protection, they are 

equipped with short-circuit releases which are permanently set to a value equivalent to 13 times the rated current of the motor 

protection switches. They are not equipped with overload releases. On overload, the overload relay triggers the contactor, the 

motor protection switches remains closed. Only when a short-circuit occurs in the feeder does the motor protection switches 

trip as well. The motor protection switches for starter combinations must always be used in combination with an overload relay 

because the motor protection switches alone cannot protect the motor and itself against overload. 

W MAIN AND EMERGENCY-STOP SWITCHES 

The BES motor protection switches comply with the isolating function to IEC 60947-2, therefore they can be used – taking IEC 

60204-1 into account – as main and EMERGENCY-STOP switches. BES door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for heavy 

duty also comply with the requirements for the isolating function. 

W USE OF IT SYSTEMS (IT NETWORKS) 

BES motor protection switches are suitable for operation in IT systems according to IEC 60947-2. In the event of a 3-pole 

short-circuit, their response in this system is the same as in others: Therefore, the same short-circuit breaking capacity I cu and 

I cs applies, see "Technical specifications". An initial fault (ground fault) does not necessarily force immediate disconnection of 

the network when operating IT systems. If a second independent error occurs (ground fault), the switching capacity of the 

motor protection switches might be reduced. This is the case if both ground faults occur in different phases and if one of the 

ground faults occurs on the input side and the other on the outgoing terminal of the motor protection switches. In order to 

maintain the short-circuit function of the motor protection switches even with two independent ground faults (double 

ground faults), the reduced short-circuit breaking capacity with double ground faults must be taken into account in IT systems 

I cuIT (see "Technical specifications"). If a ground fault is instantaneously recognized and remedied (ground-fault monitoring), 

the risk of double ground fault and thus reduced short-circuit breaking capacity I cuIT can be minimized. 

W SWITCHING OF DC CURRENTS 

BES motor protection switches for alternating currents are also suitable for DC switching. The maximum permissible DC 

voltage per conducting path must, however, be adhered to. Higher voltages require a series connection with 2 or 3 conducting 

paths. The response values of the overload release remain unchanged; the response values of a short-circuit release increase by 

approximately 30 % for DC. The example circuits for DC switching can be seen in the table below. 

Example circuit for size S00 to S3 BES motor protection switches 

Example circuit for 

size S00 to S3 BES 

motor protection 

switches 

L+ L 

M 

L+ L 

M 

L+ L 

M 

Maximum permitted 

DC voltage U e 

Notes 

150 V DC 2-pole switching, non-grounded system 1) 

If there is no possibility of a ground fault, or if every ground fault is rectified immediately 

(ground-fault monitoring), then the maximum permitted DC voltage can be tripled. 

300 V DC 2-pole switching, grounded system 

The grounded pole is always assigned to the individual conducting path, so that there 

are always 2 conducting paths in series in the event of a ground fault. 

450 V DC 1-pole switching, grounded system 

3 conducting paths in series. The grounded pole is assigned to the unconnected 

conducting path. 

1) It is assumed that this circuit always provides safe disconnection even in the event of a double ground fault that bridges two contacts. 

Page 

175

Page 

176 

BESD0063 


W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 00 

DESCRIPTION SHORT CIRUIT BRAKING CAPACITY SIZE ORDER NO. 

ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH SIZE 00 


For mounting BESD.. onto contactor size 00 use LSZDD005 (AC-DC). 

Motor protection switch 0,16A, Class 10 100kA 00 BESD0016 


















Motor protection switch 10A, Class 10 50kA 00 BESD1000 

Motor protection switch 12A, Class 10 50kA 00 BESD1200



BES00400 




For mounting BES0.. onto contactor size 0 use LSZ0D002 (AC) or LSZ0D004 (DC). 

For mounting BES0.. onto contactor size 00 use LSZDD006 (AC-DC). 

Motor protection switch 0,16A, Class 10 100kA 0 BES00016 


















Motor protection switch 10A, Class 10 100kA 0 BES01000 






Page 

177

Page 

178 



BES2.... 









BES3.... 






Motor protection switch 100A, Class 10 50kA 3 BES39999

W AUXILLIARY SWITCH 

BEZ00001 

MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES – ACCESSORIES 


AUXILLIARY SWITCH 

Auxilliary switch side mounted 1 NO + 1 NC 00/0/2/3 BEZ00001 

Auxilliary switch front mounted 1 NO + 1 NC 00/0/2/3 BEZ00003 

Auxilliary switch side mounted 2 NO 00/0/2/3 BEZ00002 

Auxilliary switch front mounted 2 NO 00/0/2/3 BEZ00004 

W SIGNALING SWITCH 

BEZ00005 


SIGNALING SWITCH 

Signaling switch 1 NO + 1 NC 0/2/3 BEZ00005 

W UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE 

BEZ00006 


UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE 

Undervoltage release side mounted AC 230V/50HZ, AC 240V/60HZ 00/0/2/3 BEZ00006 

Undervoltage release side mounted AC 400V/50HZ, AC 440V/60HZ 00/0/2/3 BEZ00007 

Page 

179

Page 

180 


W SHUNT TRIP 

BEZ00009 


SHUNT TRIP 

Shunt trip side mounted AC 20...24V, 50/60HZ, 100% ED 00/0/2/3 BEZ00008 

Shuntt trip side mounted AC 210...240V, 50/60HZ,100% ED 00/0/2/3 BEZ00009 

W HOUSINGS AND LOCKING PLATE 

BEZ00012 


HOUSINGS 

Moulded plastic housing, membran IP55 00 BEZ00012 

Moulded plastic housing, emergency stop, mushroom head (yellow/red) 00 BEZ00013 

Moulded plastic housing, rotary handle IP55 0 BEZ00112 

Moulded plastic housing, emergency stop IP55 (yellow/red) 0 BEZ00113 

Moulded plastic housing, rotary handle IP55 2 BEZ00212 

Moulded plastic housing, emergency stop IP55 (yellow/red) 2 BEZ00213 

LOCKING PLATE 

Locking plate for 3 padlocks 00 BEZ00014 

W BUSBARS 

BEZ00017 


BUSBARS 

3-pole busbar for 2 motor protection switches 00/0 BEZ00017 




3-pole busbar for 2 motor protection switches 2 BEZ00217 

3-pole busbar for 3 motor protection switches 2 BEZ00218


W COVERS FOR SPARE-PLACE 

BEZ00019 


COVERS FOR SPARE-PLACE 

Cover for spare-place, blank plate (45 mm) 00/0 BEZ00019 

Cover for spare-place, blank plate (55 mm) 2 BEZ00219 

W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING) 

BEZ00010 


ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISM 

Rotary operating (door coupling) 0/2/3 BEZ00010 

Rotary operating, emergency stop (door coupling) yellow/red 0/2/3 BEZ00011 

W FEED TERMINALS 

BEZ00116 


FEED TERMINALS 

Feed Terminal Size 00 for 3-phase-busbar (25 mm 2 ) 00 BEZ00016 



Page 

181

Page 

182 


W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 TO 3 

Short-circuit breaking capacity I cu, I cs according to IEC 60947-2 

This table shows the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity I cu and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity I cs 

of the BES motor protection switches with different inception voltages dependent of the rated current I n of the motor 

protection switches. 

Motor protection switches infeed is permissible at the upper or lower terminals without restricting the rated data. If the shortcircuit 

current at the place of installation exceeds the rated shortcircuit breaking capacity of the motor protection switches as 

specified in the table, a back-up fuse is required. Alternatively, a motor protection switches with a limiter function can be 

connected upstream. 

The maximum rated current for the back-up fuse is specified in the tables. The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity 

then applies as specified on the fuse. 

Circuit breakers/ Rated Up to AC 240 V 1) Up to AC 400 V 1)/415 V 2) Up to AC 440 V 1)/460 V 2) Up to AC 500 V 1)/525 V 2) Up to AC 690 V 1) 

Motor starter current I n 

protectors Icu Ics max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse 

(gL/gG) (gL/gG) 3) (gL/gG) 3) (gL/gG) 3) (gL/gG) 3)4) 

Type 

Size 00 

A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A 

BESD 0.16 ... 1 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 

1.25; 1.6 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 2 2 20 

2; 2.5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 10 10 35 2 2 35 

3.2; 4 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 10 40 3 3 40 2 2 40 

5; 6.3 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 10 50 3 3 50 2 2 50 

8 100 100 ° 50 12.5 80 50 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 63 

10 100 100 ° 50 12.5 80 10 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 63 

Size 0 

12 100 100 ° 50 12.5 80 10 10 80 3 3 80 2 2 80 

BES0 0.16 ... 1.6 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 

2; 2.5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 8 8 25 

3.2 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 8 8 32 

4; 5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 6 3 32 

6.3 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 6 3 50 

8 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 25 63 42 21 63 6 3 50 

10 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 25 80 42 21 63 6 3 50 

12.5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 25 80 42 21 80 6 3 63 

16 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63 

20 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63 

Size 2 

22; 25 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 10 100 10 5 80 4 2 63 

BES2 16 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 25 100 12 6 63 5 3 63 

20 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 25 100 12 6 80 5 3 63 

25 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 15 100 12 6 80 5 3 63 

32 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 63 

40; 45 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 63 

Size 3 

50 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 80 

BES3 40 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 20 125 12 6 100 6 3 63 

50 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 20 125 12 6 100 6 3 80 

63 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 12 6 100 6 3 80 

75 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 100 

90; 100 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 125 

Short-circuit resistant up to at least 50 kA 

° No back-up fuse required, since short-circuit resistant up to 100 kA 

1) 10 % overvoltage. 


3) Back-up fuse only required if the short-circuit current at the place of installation > Icu. 4) Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations for 690 V AC can also be used.



Short-circuit breaking capacity I cuIT in the IT system (IT network) according to IEC60947-2 

BES motor protection switches are suitable for operation in IT systems. Values valid for triple-pole short-circuit are I cu up to I cs. 

In case of double ground fault on different phases at the input and output side of a motor protection switches, the special 

short-circuit breaking capacity I cuIT applies. The specifications in the table below apply to BES motor protection switches. 

In the colored areas, I cuIT is 100 kA, or in some ranges it is 50 kA. Therefore the motor protection switches are short-circuit 

resistant in these ranges. 

If the short-circuit current at the place of installation exceeds the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the motor protection 

switches as specified in the table, a back-up fuse is required. The maximum rated current for the back-up fuse is specified in 

the tables. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity then applies as specified on the fuse. 

Motor starter Rated current Up to AC 240 V1) Up to AC 400 V1)/415 V2) Up to AC 500 V1)/525 V2) Up to AC 690 V1) 

protectors In IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse 

(gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3)4) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3) 

Type 

Size 00 

A kA A kA A kA A kA A 

BESD 0.16 ... 0.63 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 

0.8; 1 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 2 16 

1.25; 1.6 100 ° 2 20 2 20 2 20 

2; 2.5 100 ° 2 35 2 35 2 35 

3.2; 4 100 ° 2 40 2 40 2 40 

5; 6.3 100 ° 2 50 2 50 2 50 

8; 10 50 80 2 63 2 63 2 63 

Size 0 

12 50 80 2 80 2 80 2 80 

BES0 0.16 ... 0.63 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 

0.8; 1 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 6 16 

1.25; 1.6 100 ° 100 ° 8 20 6 20 

2; 2.5 100 ° 8 25 8 25 6 25 

3.2 100 ° 8 32 8 32 6 32 

4; 5 100 ° 6 32 4 32 3 32 

6.3... 10 100 ° 6 50 4 50 3 50 

12.5 100 ° 6 63 4 63 3 63 

Size 2 

16...25 50 80 4 63 3 63 2 63 

BES2 16 50 100 8 100 6 80 5 63 

20 50 125 8 100 6 80 5 63 

25 50 125 8 100 6 80 5 63 

32 50 125 6 125 4 100 3 80 

Size 3 

40... 50 50 160 6 125 4 100 3 80 

BES3 40 50 125 10 63 5 50 5 50 

50 50 125 8 80 3 63 3 63 

63 50 160 6 80 3 63 3 63 

75 50 160 5 100 2 80 2 80 

90; 100 50 160 5 125 2 100 2 100 

Short-circuit resistant up to at least 50 kA 

° No back-up fuse required, since short-circuit resistant up to 100 kA 



3) Back-up fuse only required, if short-circuit current at the place of installation > IcuIT. 4) Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations for 690 V AC can also be used. 

Page 

183

Page 

184 



General technical specifications 

Type 

Standards 

BESD BES0 BES2 BES3 

IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100) Yes 

IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101) Yes 

IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Yes 

UL489, CSA C22.2-No.5-02 No 

Size 00 0 2 3 

Number of poles 3 

Max. rated current In max (= max. rated operational current Ie) Permissible ambient temperature 

A 12 25 50 100 

Storage/transport °C –50... +80 

Operation °C –20... +702) Permissible rated current at inside temperature of control cabinet 

+60 °C % 100 

+70 °C 

Motor protection switches/circuit breaker inside enclosure 

Permissible rated current at ambient temperature of enclosure 

% 87 

+35 °C % 100 

+60 °C 

Rated operational voltage Ue % 87 

Acc. to IEC V AC 6903) Acc. to UL/CSA V AC 600 

Rated frequency Hz 50/60 

Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Utilization categories 

kV 6 

IEC 60947-2 (motor protection switches/circuit breaker) A 

IEC 60947-4-1 (motor starter) AC-3 

Trip class CLASS Acc. to IEC60947-4-1 10 10 10 10 

DC short-circuit breaking capacity (time constant t = 5 ms) 

1 conducting path 150 V DC kA 10 

2 conducting paths in series 300 V DC kA 10 

3 conducting paths in series 450 V DC kA 10 

Power loss Pv per motor starter In: ... 1.25 A W 5 -protector/circuit 

breaker In: 1.6 ... 6.3 A W 6 -- 

Dependent on rated current In In: 8 ... 12 A W 7 -- 

(upper setting range) In: ... 0.63 A W -- 5 -- 

Rper conducting path = P/I 

In: 0.8 ... 6.3 A W -- 6 -- 

2 x 3 In: 8 ... 16 A W -- 7 -- 

In: 20 ... 25 A W -- 8 -- 

In: ... 25 A W -- 12 -- 

In: 32 A W 15 

In: 40 ... 50 A W -- 20 -- 

In: ... 63 A W -- 20 

In: 75 and 90 A W -- 30 

In: ... 100 A W -- 38 

Shock resistance Acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 25/11 (square and sine pulse) 

Degree of protection Acc. to IEC 60529 IP204) Touch protection Acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe 

Temperature compensation Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 °C –20 ...+60 

Phase failure sensitivity Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 Yes 

Isolating function Acc. to IEC 60947-2 Yes 

Main and EMERGENCY-STOP switch Acc. to IEC 60204-1 Yes 

characteristics5) (VDE 0113) 

Safe isolation between main and 

auxiliary circuits, req. for PELV applications 

Acc. to EN 60947-1 

Up to 400 V + 10 % Yes 

Up to 415 V + 5 % (higher voltages on request) Yes 

Permissible mounting positions Any, acc. to IEC60447 start command "I" right-hand side or top 

Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 100000 50000 

Electrical endurance Operating cycles 100000 25000 

Max. switching frequency per hour (motor starts) 1/h 15 

2) Above +60°C current reduction. 3) 500V with molded-plastic enclosure. For short-circuit breaking capacity I cu, I cs see table of same name. 

4) Terminal compartment IP00. 

5) With appropriate accessories.



Conductor cross-sections of main circuit 

Type BESD BES0 BES2 BES3 

Connection type Screw terminals Screw terminals 

with box terminals 

Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2 4 mm Allen screw 

Prescribed tightening torque 

Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors connectable) 

Nm 0.8...1.2 2...2.5 3...4.5 4...6 

Solid mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5) 4), 2 x (1... 2.5) 4), 2 x (0.75... 16) 2 x (2.5... 16) 

2 x (0.75... 2.5) 4) 2 x (2.5... 6) 4) 

Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5) 4), 2 x (1... 2.5) 4), 2 x (0.75... 16), 2 x (2.5... 35), 

2 x (0.75... 2.5) 4) 2 x (2.5... 6) 4) 1 x (0.75... 25) 1 x (2.5... 50) 

Stranded mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5) 4), 1 x (1... 2.5) 4), 2 x (0.75... 25), 2 x (10...50), 

2 x (0.75... 2.5) 4) 2 x (2.5... 6) 1 x (0.75... 35) 1 x (10...50) 

AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18... 14) 2 x (14... 10) 2 x (18... 2), 2 x (10... 1/0), 

1 x (18... 2) 1 x (10... 2/0) 

Ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 

With copper bars2) -- -- 18 x 10 

With cable lugs3) -- -- up to 2 x 70 

Connection type Cage Clamp terminals5) Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors connectable) 

on request 

Solid mm2 2 x (0.25... 2.5) -- -- 

Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25... 1.5) -- -- 

Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25... 2.5) -- -- 

AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24... 14) -- -- 

Max. external diameter of the cable insulation mm 3.6 

1) Cable-lug and busbar connection possible after removing the boxterminals. 

2) If bars larger than 12mmx10mm are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request). 

3) If conductors larger than 25mm2 are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request). 



5) With conductor cross-sections of " 1mm2 an "insulation stop" must be used. 

Page 

185

Page 

186 



Permissible rated data of devices approved for North America (UL/CSA) 

motor protection switches of the BES series are approved for UL/CSA and according to UL 508 and CSA C22.2 No. 14 they 

can be used on their own or as a load feeder in combination with a contactor. These motor protection switches can be used 

as "Manual Motor Controllers" for "Group Installations", as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection 

in Group Installations" and as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers" (Type E). 

BES motor protection switches as "Manual Motor Controllers" 

If used as a "Manual Motor Controller", the motor protection switches is always operated in combination with an upstream 

short-circuit protection device. Approved fuses or a circuit breaker according to UL489/CSAC22.2 No. 5-02 can be used. These 

devices must be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code (UL) or Canadian Electrical Code (CSA). 

Motor protection switchess hp rating 1) for FLA 2) Rated current 240 V AC 480 V AC 600 V AC 

max. I n UL CSA UL CSA UL CSA 

I bc 3) I bc 3) I bc 3) I bc 3) I bc 3) I bc 3) 

Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kA kA kA kA 

Size 00 

BESD 0.16 ... 2 65 65 65 65 10 10 

2.5 65 65 65 65 10 10 

FLA 2) max. 12 A, 115 1/2 -- 3.2 65 65 65 65 10 10 

600 V 200 1 1/2 3 4 65 65 65 65 10 10 

NEMA size 00 230 2 3 5 65 65 65 65 10 10 

460 -- 7 1/2 6.3 65 65 65 65 10 10 

575/600 -- 10 8 65 65 65 65 10 10 

10 65 65 65 65 10 10 

12 65 65 65 65 10 10 

Size 0 

BES0 0.16 ... 3.2 65 65 65 65 30 30 

4 65 65 65 65 30 30 

FLA 2) max. 25 A, 115 2 -- 5 65 65 65 65 30 30 

600 V 200 3 5 6.3 65 65 65 65 30 30 

NEMA size 1 230 3 7 1/2 8 65 65 65 65 30 30 

460 -- 15 10 65 65 65 65 30 30 

575/600 -- 20 12.5 65 65 65 65 30 30 

16 65 65 65 65 10 10 

20 65 65 65 65 10 10 

22 65 65 65 65 10 10 

25 65 65 65 65 10 10 

Size 2 

BES2 16 65 65 65 65 30 25 

20 65 65 65 65 30 25 

FLA 2) max. 50 A, 115 3 -- 25 65 65 65 65 30 25 

600 V 200 7 1/2 15 32 65 65 65 65 30 25 

NEMA size 2 230 10 20 40 65 65 65 65 30 25 

460 -- 40 45 65 65 65 65 30 25 

575/600 -- 50 50 65 65 65 65 30 25 

Size 3 

BES3 16 65 65 65 65 30 30 

20 65 65 65 65 30 30 

FLA 2) max. 99 A, 115 7 1/2 -- 25 65 65 65 65 30 30 

600 V 200 20 30 32 65 65 65 65 30 30 

NEMA size 3 230 20 40 40 65 65 65 65 30 30 

460 -- 75 50 65 65 65 65 30 30 

575/600 -- 100 63 65 65 65 65 30 30 

75 65 65 65 65 30 30 

90 65 65 65 65 10 10 

100 65 65 65 65 10 10 

1) hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating). 

2) FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current. 

3) Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL/CSA.



BES motor protection switches as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations" 

The application as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations" is only available 

from UL. 

CSA does not recognize this approval! When the motor protection switches is used as a "Manual Motor Controller Suitable 

for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations", it must always be combined with upstream short-circuit protection. As 

short-circuit-protection device, approved fuses or a motor protection switches according to UL 489 can be used.These devices 

must be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code. 

Motor protection switchess hp rating 1) for FLA 2) Rated current I n 240 V AC Up to 480 V AC Up to 600 V AC 

Max. UL UL UL 

I bc 3) I bc 3) I bc 3) 

Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kA 

Size 00 

BESD 0.16 ... 0.8 65 65 10 

1 65 65 10 

FLA 2) max. 8 A, 115 1/3 -- 1.25 65 65 10 

480 V 200 3/4 2 2 65 65 10 

NEMA size 0 230 1 2 2.5 65 65 10 

460 -- 5 3.2 65 65 10 

575/600 -- -- 4 65 65 10 

5 65 65 10 

6.3 65 65 10 

8 65 65 10 

Size 0 

BES0 0.16 ... 1.6 65 65 30 

2 65 65 30 

FLA 2) max. 115 2 -- 2.5 65 65 30 

22 A, 480 V 200 3 5 3.2 65 65 30 

12.5 A, 600 V 230 3 7 1/2 4 65 65 30 

460 -- 15 5 65 65 30 

NEMA size 1 575/600 -- 10 6.3 65 65 30 

8 65 65 30 

10 65 65 30 

12.5 65 65 30 

Size 2 

BES3 16 65 65 25 

20 65 65 25 

FLA 2) max. 115 3 -- 25 65 65 25 

50 A, 600 V 200 7 1/2 15 32 65 65 25 

NEMA size 2 230 10 20 40 65 65 25 

460 -- 40 45 65 65 25 

575/600 -- 50 50 65 65 25 

Size 3 

BES4 16 65 65 30 

20 65 65 30 

FLA 2) max. 115 7 1/2 -- 25 65 65 30 

100 A, 480 V 200 20 30 32 65 65 30 

75 A, 600 V 230 20 40 40 65 65 30 

460 -- 75 50 65 65 30 

NEMA size 3 575/600 -- 75 63 65 65 30 

75 65 65 30 

90 65 65 -- 

100 65 65 -- 

1) hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating). 

2) FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current. 

3) Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL. 

Rated data of the auxiliary switches and signaling switches 

Type Lateral auxiliary Transverse auxiliary switches with 

switches with 

1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 

and signaling switch 

Max. rated voltage 

Acc. to NEMA (UL) VAC 600 250 

Acc. to NEMA (CSA) VAC 600 250 

Uninterrupted current A 10 2.5 

Switching capacity A600 C300 

Q300 R300 

Page 

187

Page 

188 

ACCESSORIES 

W ACCESSORIES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES 

Front transverse auxiliary switches (front mounted) 

Switching capacity for different voltages 

1NO + 1NC, 2NO 

Rated operational current Ie At AC-15, alternating voltage 

- 24 V A 2 

- 230 V A 0.5 

- 400 V A -- 

- 690 V 

At AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage 

A -- 

- 24 V A 2.5 

- 230 V A 2.5 

- 400 V A -- 

- 690 V 

At DC-13, direct voltage L/R 200ms 

A -- 

- 24 V A 1 

- 48 V A 0.3 

- 60 V A 0.15 

- 110 V A -- 

- 220 V A -- 

Minimum load capacity V 17 

Lateral auxiliary switches and signaling switch (side mounted) 

Rated operational current Ie At AC-15, alternating voltage 

mA 1 

Switching capacity for different voltages 

1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO and signalling switch 

- 24 V A 6 

- 230 V A 4 

- 400 V A 3 

- 690 V 

At AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage 

A 1 

- 24 V A 10 

- 230 V A 10 

- 400 V A 10 

- 690 V 

At DC, direct voltage L/R 200 ms 

A 10 

- 24 V A 2 

- 110 V A 0.5 

- 220 V A 0.25 

- 440 V A 0.1 

Minimum load capacity V 17 

Auxiliary trip units 

mA 1 

Undervoltage release Shunt trip unit 

Power consumption 

During pick-up 

- AC voltages VA/W 20.2 / 13 20.2 / 13 

- DC voltages 

During continuous duty 

W 20 13 ... 80 

- AC voltages VA/W 7.2 / 2.4 -- 

- DC voltages 

Response voltage 

W 2.1 -- 

Tripping V 0.35 ... 0.7 x Us 0.7 ... 1.1 x Us Pickup V 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us -- 

Maximum opening time ms 20

W ACCESSORIES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES 

ACCESSORIES 

Short-circuit protection for auxiliary and control circuits 

Melting fuses gL/gG A 10 

Miniature circuit breaker, C characteristic A 6 Prospective short-circuit current < 0.4 kA. 

Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary and control circuits 



Prescribed tightening torque Nm 0.8...1.2 

Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors) 

Solid mm 2 2 x (0.5... 1.5) 1)/2 x (0.75... 2.5) 1) 

Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 2 x (0.5... 1.5) 1)/2 x (0.75... 2.5) 1) 

Stranded mm 2 2 x (0.5... 1.5) 1)/2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 1) 

AWG cables AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 

Connection type Cage Clamp terminals 2) (on request) 

Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors connectable) 

Solid mm 2 2 x (0.25... 2.5) 

Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 2 x (0.25... 1.5) 

Finely stranded without end sleeve mm 2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) 

AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24... 14) 

Max. external diameter of the cable insulation mm 3.6 



2) With conductor cross-sections of ≤ 1 mm2 an "insulation stop" must be used; 

Page 

189

Page 

190 

CHARACTERISTIC CURVES 

W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES – CHARACTERISTIC CURVES 

The time/current characteristic, the current limiting characteristics and the I2t characteristic curves were determined 

according to DIN VDE 0660 and IEC 60947. The tripping characteristic of the inverse-time delayed overload release 

(thermal overload releases, 'a' releases) for DC and AC with a frequency of 0 Hz to 400 Hz applies for the time/current 

characteristic. 

The characteristic curves apply to the cold state; at operating temperature, the tripping times of the thermal trip units 

are reduced to approximately 25 %. Under normal operating conditions, all three poles of the device must be loaded. 

The three main current paths must be connected in series in order to protect single-phase or DC loads. 

With 2-pole and 3-pole loading, the maximum deviation in the tripping time of 3 times the set current and upwards is 

±20 % and thus in accordance with DIN VDE 0165. The tripping characteristics for the instantaneous, electromagnetic 

electronic trip units (short-circuit releases, 'n' releases) are based on the rated current In that also represents the 

maximum value of the setting range for motor protection switches with adjustable overload releases. If the current is set 

to a lower value, the tripping current of the 'n' release is increased by a corresponding factor. 

The characteristic curves of the electromagnetic electronic trip units apply to frequencies of 50 Hz/60 Hz. Appropriate 

correction factors must be used for lower frequencies down to 16 2/3 Hz, for higher frequencies up to 400 Hz and for 

DC. 

W REPRESENTATION OF TYPICAL TIME/CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC OF BES 

Opening time 

10 000 

100 

min 5000 

60 

40 

2000 

1000 

10 

500 

5 

200 

2 

100 

1 

50 

20 

10 

5 

2 

1 

0,5 

0,2 

0,1 

0,05 

0,02 

0,01 

0,005 

0,002 

2-pole 

loading 

Class 10 

0,001 

0,6 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 

0,8 

3-pole 

loading 

Class 10 

20 30 40 60 80 x n 

Current 

The above characteristic curve for the motor starter 

protector relates to a specific setting range. It is, however, 

also valid as a schematic representation of motor protection 

switches with other current ranges. Time/current 

characteristic curves, current limiting characteristic curves 

and I 2 t curves are available.


W BESD MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 00 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3RV1 motor starter protectors, size S2 

W BES2 MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 2 

3RV10 31, 3RV13 31, 3RV14 31 

125 

89 

3RV1 motor starter protectors, size S3 

W3RV104, BES3 3RV134 MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 3 

$ # 

' 

1) 2) 

11) 

20 

9 18 55 18 

& % 

& 

! 

 

3) 

45 

85 

140 

" # 

$ 

# 

' 

8) 

& 

% 

# 

5 

8 

1) Side mounted auxiliary switch, 2-pole – BEZ00001,2 

2) Signaling switch (S0 ... S3) side mounted – BEZ00005 

3) Auxiliary trip unit: undervoltage release – BEZ00006,7; shunt trip – BEZ00008,9 

4) Front mounted auxiliary switch – BEZ00003,4 


8) Standard mounting rail TH 35 according to EN 60715 

9) For mounting according to EN 60715 on TH 35 standard mounting rail, 15 mm deep, or TH 75 standard mounting rail 


11) Lockable in neutral position with 3.5 ... 4.5 mm shackle diameter 

 

121 

 

 

 

109 

127 

132 

144 

" $ 

! 

# ! 

# % 

$ ' 

 

DIMENSIONS 

W BES0 MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 0 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4) 

" 

130 

# # 

30 

7) 

! 

% 

# 

5 

 

 

 

 

 

Page 

191

Page 

192 

DIMENSIONS 

W BUSBARS 

W 3-PHASE BUSBAR FOR MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 AND 0, MODULAR SPACING 45 mm 1) 

For two motor protection switches BEZ00017 

For three motor protection switches BEZ00018 

For four motor protection switches BEZ00020 

For five motor protection switches BEZ00021 

" # 

& ! 

& 

1) Covers for space place (45 mm) 

Size 00/0 BEZ00019 

2) Covers for space place (55 mm) 

Size 2 BEZ00219 

% ! 

& 

) 

* 

! 

Size A B 

S00 111 67 

S0 119 70 

W 3-PHASE BUSBAR FOR MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZE 2, MODULAR SPACING 55 mm 2) 

For two motor protection switches BEZ00217 

For three motor protection switches BEZ00218 

55 

110 

165 

33 

33 

168 

98 

15

W FEED TERMINALS 

W TERMINAL BEZ00016 

for motor protection switches size 00 

Connected from top 

" " 

W FEED TERMINAL BEZ00216 


# # 

# 

! " 

$ 

' 

" 

W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING) 

W BEZ00010/11 

for motor protection switches size 0, 2, 3 

Long shaft (with bracket) 3) 

1) Lockable in neutral position with max. 8 mm shackle diameter. 

2) Mounted with screw cap. 

3) Supplied with a shaft length of 330 mm; can be adjusted by shortening the shaft. 

5) Grounding terminal 35 mm2 and sheet-metal bracket for shaft. 

W TERMINAL BEZ00116 

DIMENSIONS 


Connected from top 

# 

" " 

" " 

% ! 

# " 

Page 

193

Page 

194 

DIMENSIONS 

W MOLDED-PLASTIC ENCLOSURES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING 

W BEZ00012, BEZ00013 – SIZE 00 

BEZ00012 with membrane, BEZ00013 with emergency stop mushroom head 


% % # 

" # ' 

! 

" 

" # " & 

" # 

= & ' 

3) Knock-outs for M25 

4) Knock-outs for rear cable entry M20 

6) Max. shackle diameter for padlock 8 mm 

8) Locking plate BEZ00014 

9) EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button 

> d) # 

BEZ00112, BEZ00113 with rotary handle 

and rotary handle for emergency stop 


" # 

a) 105 mm 

# # 

" # " & 

" # 

= $ 

1) Knock-outs for M25 


3) Opening for padlock with shackle diameter max. 6 ... 8 mm 

' 

& 

! 

# # 

! ? 

$ 

& 

> d) " ! 

' 

> 

a) 105 mm 

b) With EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button: 154 mm 

Dimensions refer to mounting surface 

c) With EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button: 64 mm 

d) Dimensions refer to mounting surface 

W BEZ00112, BEZ00113 – SIZE 0 W BEZ00212, BEZ00213 – SIZE 2 

BEZ00212, BEZ00213 with rotary handle 

and rotary handle for emergency stop 


! 

# 

' 

1) Knock-outs for M32 (left) and M40 (right) 


3) Opening for padlock with shackle diameter max. 6 ... 8 mm 

# 

! # 

% 

# 

& 

& 

!

W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 

SCHEMATICS 

Lateral auxiliary switch (side mounted) Transverse auxiliary switch (front mounted) 

BEZ00001 – 1NO + 1NC BEZ00002 – 2NO BEZ00003 – 1NO + 1NC BEZ00004 – 2NO 

 

 

Signaling switch 

BEZ00005 – 1NO + 1NC ... overload release Undervoltage release Shunt trip 

1NO + 1NC ... short circuit release BEZ00006/7 BEZ00008/9 

 

 

 

 

BESD, BES0, BES2, BES3 

! 

! # 

L 

6 

L 

L 

" $ 

6 6 ! 

W CONTROL DIAGRAMS 

 

 

Undervoltage release Shunt trip 

W SWITCHING EXAMPLES 

BES motor protection switches with BEZ00005 signaling switch 

S 

 

 

 

 

 

 

13 23 

14 24 

S0, S1, S2 OFF pushbutton in the system 

Q1 Motor protection switche 

S Auxiliary switch of the motor protection switch Q1 

F1; F2 Fuse (gL/gG) max. 10 A 

F3 Shunt trip 

F4 Undervoltage releases 

Separate "tripped" and "shortcircuit" signals: 

S1 Signaling switch 

Q1 Motor protection switche 

F1 Fuse (gL/gG), max. 10 A 

H1 Signal lamp "Short-circuit" 

H2 Signal lamp "Overload" or "Tripping by auxiliary trip unit" 

 

 

Page 

195

Page 

196 

INDEX 

OVERVIEW FOR: 

LSDD CONTACTORS 

LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

CONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3POLE 

LSSD CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE 

LSD0 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE 



LSS0 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE 

LSD6 CONTACTORS 

LSDE CONTACTORS 

LSDG CONTACTORS 

LSD CONTACTORS 

LSDE CONTACTORS 

LSDG CONTACTORS 

LSD CONTACTORS 



BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES 

GENERAL INFORMATIONS FOR: 

LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3POLE 

LSS CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3POLE 

LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3POLE 



BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES 

PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS FOR: 

LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 00 



LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 6/10/12 

LSD VACUUM CONTACTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 14 

LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2/3 

LSY WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2 

LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS – 4POLE, SIZE 00/0 

LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS – 4POLE, SIZE 2/3 

LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS 

LA3K CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS 

AUXILIARY CONTACTS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS LA3K 

LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 – 4POLE, SIZE 00 

AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD OR LSSD, SIZE 00 

AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD, LSSD OR LSHD, 

SIZE 00 

PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINAL, SIZE 00 

WIRING SETS, MECHANICAL INTERLOCK AND CONNECTION CLIPS, SIZE 00 

WYE-DELTA TIMERS 

CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION 

SWITCHES, SIZE 00 

SOLDER PIN ADAPTER, SIZE 00 

SURGE SUPRESSORS (PLUG IN TYPE), SIZE 00 

AUXILIARY CONTACTS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SIDE MOUNTED), SIZE 0-12 

MECHANICAL INTERLOCKS, SIZE 0-12 

WIRING SETS FOR REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, SIZE 0-12 

WIRING SETS FOR YD-ASSEMBLIES AND YD-ACCESSORIES, SIZE 0-3 

CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION 

SWITCHES, SIZE 0-3 

PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINALS, SIZE 0-12 

SURGE SUPRESSORS, SIZE 0-12 

CONNECTION CLIPS FOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0-3 

MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK, SIZE 0-2 

TERMINAL COVERS, SIZE 2-14 

BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOAD, AC OPERATED 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK FOR BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS 

BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR 4-POLE, SOLENOID OPERATED, SEALABLE 

6 

6 

4 

6 

7 

7 

7 

7 

8 

8 

8 

9 

10 

10 

11 

12 

144 

170 

13 

15 

15 

17 

146 

175 

18 

20 

20 

21 

21 

22 

22 

23 

23 

24 

24 

25 

25 

26 

26 

26 

27 

27 

27 

28 

28 

28 

29 

29 

29 

30 

30 

30 

31 

31 

32 

32 

32 

124 

125 

125 

LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 

3POLE 

LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 

4POLE 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 

LA1 MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 – 4POLE 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

SURGE SUPPRESSOR FOR MINIATUR CONTACTORS 

LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SIZE 00 




HOLDER FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY 

LA1 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS WITH HAND RESET 

BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 00 




AUXILLIARY SWITCH FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 

SIGNALING SWITCH FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 

UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 

SHUNT TRIP FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 

HOUSINGS AND LOCKING PLATE FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 

BUSBARS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 

COVERS FOR SPARE-PLACE FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 

ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 

FEED TERMINALS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR: 

LSD CONTACTORS, 3POLE, 3 ... 250 kW 

LSS CONTACTORS, 3POLE, 3 ... 250 kW 

LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3POLE, 335 ... 450 kW 

LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING RESISTIVE LOADS 

LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, 4POLE 

LSS CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE 

ACCESSORIES FOR LSD AND LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 


LA3K CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS 

LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 

WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 

LSY COMPLETE UNITS 

MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R.. 

CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR 

TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R40 

POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR 

TYPES R.., K1R40 AND AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK RH11 

MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1009.. 

MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LA1007.. 


ACCESSORY FOR MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LSTD 

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LST0 



THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 00 




ACCESSORIES FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER 


TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS FOR LA1003.. 

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER 


BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 TO 3 

ACCESSORIES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES 

134 

134 

134 

135 

135 

135 

149 

149 

150 

150 

150 

162 

176 

177 

178 

178 

179 

179 

179 

180 

180 

180 

181 

181 

181 

33 

33 

71 

79 

83 

88 

89 

90 

92 

95 

97 

99 

126 

130 

130 

136 

138 

139 

139 

151 

151 

151 

151 

154 

155 

154 

155 

156 

163 

164 

165 

182 

188

DIMENSIONS FOR: 

LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE 

100 

LSD2 CONTACTORS, SIZE 2 

101 


101 


102 

LSDE CONTACTORS, SIZE 10 

102 

LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZE 12 

103 

LSDH6 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14 

103 


103 

LSRD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 

104 

LSR0 CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 

104 


104 


104 

LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 

105 

LSHD...N, LSHD...G AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00 

105 

LSKD CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 

106 

LSK0 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 

106 

LSK3 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 3 

106 

LA3K18.. 

107 

LA3K24.., LA3K32.. 

107 

LA3K50.., LA3K62.., LA3K74.. 

107 

LA3K90.., LA3K11.. 

107 

LSZDD003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 00 

108 

LSZDD004 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 00 

108 

LSZ0D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 0 

108 

LSZ2D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 0 

108 

LSZ00113 MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK 

108 

LSZ2D002 TERMINAL COVER FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 2 

108 

LSZ3D002 TERMINAL COVER FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 3 

108 

LSZDH5.., LSZDD2..* 

108 


LSZD0501, LSZD0510 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00 AUXILIARY 

109 

CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00 

109 

LSZ0D0.., LSZ0D9.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 TO 12 

109 

LSZ0D711, LSZ3D811* AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 (*3) TO 12 109 

ACCESSORIES FOR LSD CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 

109 

LSWD, SIZE 00 

110 

LSW0, SIZE 0 

110 

LSW2, SIZE 2 

110 

LSW3, SIZE 3 

110 

LSYD, SIZES 00 – 00 – 00 

111 

LSY0, SIZES 0 – 0 – 0 

111 

LSY2, SIZES 2 – 2 – 0 

111 

SCREW CONNECTION LSTD SIZE 00 

158 


158 


158 


158 

INTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 159 

POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 159 

PROTECTION OF DC MOTORS 

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 

159 

LA1003.. 

CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1 FOR 

166 

MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 

POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1 FOR 

167 

MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 

167 

BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 TO 3 

191 

BUSBARS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES 

192 

3-PHASE FEED TERMINALS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES 

ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING) FOR BES MOTOR 

193 

PROTECTION SWITCHES 

MOLDED-PLASTIC ENCLOSURES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING FOR BES MOTOR 

193 

PROTECTION SWITCHES 

194 

INDEX 

CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES: 

LSDD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 

LSD0 CONTACTORS, SIZES 0 TO 12 




LSDE CONTACTORS, SIZES 0 TO 13 

LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZES 0 TO 13 



LSRD CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZE 00 

LSR2 CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZES 0 TO 3 




LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 

LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00 

LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00 

ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NO INCLUDED, 

SIZE 00 

ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LSDD, 

LSSD WITH 1 NC INCLUDED 

ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 

ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 TO 12 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12 

FIRST LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2POLE, 

FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12 

SECOND LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2POLE 

SURGE SUPPRESSORS FOR SIZES 00 TO 12 (CODED PLUG-IN DIRECTION) 

POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NO 

CONTACT 

POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES 

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR LSY WYE-DELTA STARTING CONTACTOR 

ASSEMBLIES 

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS 

CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 

POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 

POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 

POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR 


112 

112 

112 

112 

112 

112 

112 

112 

112 

112 

112 

112 

112 

112 

113 

113 

113 

113 

113 

113 

114 

114 

114 

114 

114 

114 

115 

117 

118 

119 

120 

121 

140 

141 

142 

142 

Page 

197

Page 

198 

B 

LIST OF ARTICLES 

ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE 

BES00016 177 

BES00020 177 

BES00025 177 

BES00032 177 

BES00040 177 

BES00050 177 

BES00063 177 

BES00080 177 

BES00100 177 

BES00125 177 

BES00160 177 

BES00200 177 

BES00250 177 

BES00320 177 

BES00400 177 

BES00500 177 

BES00630 177 

BES00800 177 

BES01000 177 

BES01200 177 

BES01600 177 

BES02000 177 

BES02200 177 

BES02500 177 

BES22500 178 

BES23200 178 

BES24000 178 

BES24500 178 

BES25000 178 

BES36300 178 

BES37500 178 

BES39000 178 

BES39999 178 

BESD0016 176 

BESD0020 176 

BESD0025 176 

BESD0032 176 

BESD0040 176 

BESD0050 176 

BESD0063 176 

BESD0080 176 

BESD0100 176 

BESD0125 176 

BESD0160 176 

BESD0200 176 

BESD0250 176 

BESD0320 176 

BESD0400 176 

BESD0500 176 

BESD0630 176 

BESD0800 176 

BESD1000 176 

BESD1200 176 

BEZ00001 179 

BEZ00002 179 

BEZ00003 179 

BEZ00004 179 

BEZ00005 179 

BEZ00006 179 

BEZ00007 179 

BEZ00008 180 

BEZ00009 180 

BEZ00010 172 

BEZ00011 172 

BEZ00011 181 

BEZ00012 180 

BEZ00013 180 

BEZ00014 180 

BEZ00016 181 

BEZ00017 180 

BEZ00018 180 

BEZ00019 181 

BEZ00020 180 

BEZ00021 180 

BEZ00112 180 

BEZ00113 180 

BEZ00116 181 

BEZ00212 180 

BEZ00213 180 

BEZ00216 181 

BEZ00217 180 

BEZ00218 180 

BEZ00219 181 

BZ326421 124 

BZ326437 124 

BZ326438 124 

BZ326439 124 

BZ326441 125 

BZ326442 124 

BZ326443 124 

BZ326444 124 

BZ326445 124 

BZ326452 124 

BZ326453 124 

BZ326460 124 

BZ326461 124 

BZ326462 124 

BZ326463 124 

BZ326464 124 

BZ326465 124 

BZ326466 124 

BZ326467 124 

BZ326468 124 

BZ326469 124 

BZ326470 125 

BZ326471 124 

BZ326474 124 

BZ326475 124 

BZ326476 124 

BZ326479 124 

BZ326480 124 

BZ326481 124 

L 

LA100301 162 

LA100302 162 

LA100303 162 

LA100304 162 

LA100305 162 

LA100306 162 

LA100307 162 

LA100308 162 

LA100309 162 

LA100310 162 

LA100311 162 

LA100312 162 

LA100770 135 

LA100773 135 

LA100774 135 

LA100780 135 

LA100783 135 

LA100790 135 

LA100793 135 

LA100795 135 

LA100910 134 

LA100913 134 

LA100915 134 

LA10091B 134 

LA100920 134 

LA100923 134 

LA100925 134 

LA100943 134 

LA10094B 134 

LA190100 25 

LA190101 25 

LA190134 25 

LA190135 25 

LA190150 134 

LA190151 134 

LA190153 135 

LA190154 135 

LA190155 135 

LA190156 135 

LA190194 135 

LA3K1133 24 

LA3K1813 24 

LA3K1823 24 

LA3K2433 24 

LA3K3233 24 

LA3K5033 24 

LA3K6233 24 

LA3K7433 24 

LA3K9033 24 

LSD00930 19 

LSD00932 19 

LSD00933 19 

LSD00935 19 

LSD01230 19 

LSD01232 19 

LSD01233 19 

LSD01235 19 

LSD01730 19 

LSD01732 19 

LSD01733 19 

LSD01734 19 

LSD01735 19 

LSD02530 19 

LSD02532 19 

LSD02533 19 

LSD02535 19 

LSD23230 20 

LSD23232 20 

LSD23233 20 

LSD23235 20 

LSD24030 20 

LSD24032 20 

LSD24033 20 

LSD24035 20 

LSD25030 20 

LSD25032 20 

LSD25033 20 

LSD25035 20 

LSD36530 20 

LSD36532 20 

LSD36533 20 

LSD36535 20 

LSD36553 20 

LSD38030 20 

LSD38032 20 

LSD38033 20 

LSD38035 20 

LSD38050 20 

LSD38052 20 

LSD39530 20 

LSD39533 20 

LSD39535 20 

LSD39553 20 

LSD6115F 21 

LSD6155F 21 

LSD6195F 21 

LSDD0710 18 

LSDD0712 18 

LSDD0713 18 

LSDD0715 18 

LSDD0720 18 

LSDD0722 18 

LSDD0723 18 

LSDD0725 18 

LSDD0910 18 

LSDD0912 18 

LSDD0913 18 

LSDD0915 18 

LSDD0920 18 

LSDD0922 18 

LSDD0923 18 

LSDD0925 18 

LSDD1210 18 

LSDD1212 18 

LSDD1213 18 

LSDD1215 18 

LSDD1220 18 

LSDD1222 18 

LSDD1223 18 

LSDD1225 18 

LSDE225F 21 

LSDE265F 21 

LSDE305F 21 

LSDG415F 21 

LSDG515F 21 

LSDH63G3 21 

LSDH64G3 21 

LSDH82G3 21 

LSDH83G3 21 

LSHD0670 25 

LSHD0673 25 

LSHD0675 25 

LSHD067G 25 

LSHD067N 25 

LSHD0680 25 

LSHD0683 25 

LSHD0685 25 

LSHD068G 25 

LSHD068N 25 

LSHD0690 25 

LSHD0693 25 

LSHD0695 25 

LSHD069G 25 

LSHD069N 25 

LSK03213 24 

LSK36213 24 

LSKD17B3 24 

LSR03540 23 

LSR03543 23 

LSR03545 23 

LSR04040 23 

LSR04043 23 

LSR04045 23 

LSR26040 23 

LSR26043 23 

LSR26045 23 

LSR31140 23 

LSR31143 23 

LSR31145 23 

LSR31440 23 

LSR31443 23 

LSR31445 23

LIST OF ARTICLES 

ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE 

LSRD1840 23 

LSRD1843 23 

LSRD1845 23 

LSRD2240 23 

LSRD2243 23 

LSRD2245 23 

LSS0123H 19 

LSS0173H 19 

LSS0253H 19 

LSSD071G 18 

LSSD072G 18 

LSSD091G 18 

LSSD092G 18 

LSSD121G 18 

LSSD122G 18 

LST00250 149 

LST00320 149 

LST00400 149 

LST00500 149 

LST00630 149 

LST00800 149 

LST01000 149 

LST01250 149 

LST01600 149 

LST02000 149 

LST02200 149 

LST02500 149 

LST20800 150 

LST21000 150 

LST21250 150 

LST21600 150 

LST22000 150 

LST22500 150 

LST23200 150 

LST24000 150 

LST24500 150 

LST25000 150 

LST32500 150 

LST33200 150 

LST34000 150 

LST35000 150 

LST36300 150 

LST37500 150 

LST39000 150 

LST39999 150 

LSTD0016 149 

LSTD0020 149 

LSTD0025 149 

LSTD0032 149 

LSTD0040 149 

LSTD0050 149 

LSTD0063 149 

LSTD0080 149 

LSTD0100 149 

LSTD0125 149 

LSTD0160 149 

LSTD0200 149 

LSTD0250 149 

LSTD0320 149 

LSTD0400 149 

LSTD0500 149 

LSTD0630 149 

LSTD0800 149 

LSTD1000 149 

LSTD1200 149 

LSW01233 22 

LSW01733 22 

LSW02533 22 

LSW23233 22 

LSW24033 22 

LSW25033 22 

LSW36533 22 

LSW38033 22 

LSW39533 22 

LSWD0733 22 

LSWD0933 22 

LSWD1233 22 

LSY03233 22 

LSY25033 22 

LSYD1733 22 

LSZ00001 31 

LSZ00002 31 

LSZ00003 31 

LSZ00113 32 

LSZ0D001 28 

LSZ0D002 30 

LSZ0D003 31 

LSZ0D004 30 

LSZ0D010 28 

LSZ0D104F 29 

LSZ0D113 29 

LSZ0D122 29 

LSZ0D122F 29 

LSZ0D131 29 

LSZ0D131F 29 

LSZ0D140F 29 

LSZ0D711 29 

LSZ0D901 28 

LSZ0D910 28 

LSZ0TE01 150 

LSZ0W001 30 

LSZ0W002 29 

LSZ0W003 32 

LSZ0W004 32 

LSZ0Y001 30 

LSZ0Y002 31 

LSZ20001 31 

LSZ2D001 32 

LSZ2D002 32 

LSZ2D003 31 

LSZ2D004 30 

LSZ2D005 30 

LSZ2TE01 150 

LSZ2W001 30 

LSZ2W002 32 

LSZ2W003 32 

LSZ2Y001 30 

LSZ2Y002 30 

LSZ2Y003 30 

LSZ2Y004 30 

LSZ2Y005 31 

LSZ3D001 31 

LSZ3D002 32 

LSZ3D003 30 

LSZ3D004 30 

LSZ3D811 29 

LSZ3TE01 150 

LSZ3W001 30 

LSZ3W002 32 

LSZ3Y004 31 

LSZ60001 31 

LSZ6D001 32 

LSZ6D002 32 

LSZ6W001 29 

LSZ6W002 30 

LSZ6Y003 31 

LSZD0001 28 

LSZD0002 28 

LSZD0003 28 

LSZD0004 28 

LSZD0005 31 

LSZD0006 31 

LSZD0101 27 

LSZD0102 27 

LSZD0501 26 

LSZD0501 26 

LSZD0510 26 

LSZD0510 26 

LSZDD001 26 

LSZDD002 28 

LSZDD003 26 

LSZDD004 26 

LSZDD005 27 

LSZDD006 27 

LSZDD201 26 

LSZDD212 26 

LSZDD213 26 

LSZDD222 26 

LSZDH522 26 

LSZDH531 26 

LSZDH540 26 

LSZDW001 27 

LSZDW002 27 

LSZDY001 27 

LSZDY002 26 

LSZED001 32 

LSZED002 32 

LSZEW001 30 

LSZEY003 31 

LSZGW001 30 

LSZHD001 32 

Page 

199

Page 

200 

GENERAL TERMS OF DELIVERY 

1. Scope 

1.1 These General Terms shall govern legal transactions between business enterprises, 

namely the delivery of commodities and, mutatis mutandis, the 

rendering of services. Software transactions are with precedence governed 

by the Software Conditions issued by the Austrian Electrical and Electronics 

Industry Association, assembly work by the Terms and Conditions for 

Assembly Work issued by the Austrian Power Current and Light Current 

Engineering Industry and/or (where applicable) the Terms and Conditions 

for the Assembly of Electrical Equipment used in Medicine issued by the 

Austrian Electrical and Electronics Industry (the current versions are available 

at www.feei.at). 

1.2 Any departure from the terms and conditions mentioned in 1.1 above shall 

be valid only if expressly accepted in writing by Seller. 

2. Submission of offers 

2.1 Seller’s offers shall be deemed offers without engagement. 

2.2 Tender documents and project documentation must not be duplicated nor 

made available to third parties without the permission of Seller. They may 

be claimed back at any time and shall be returned to Seller immediately if 

the order is placed elsewhere. 

3. Conclusion of contract 

 

of an order received or upon dispatch of a delivery. 

3.2 Particulars appearing in catalog, folders etc. as well as any oral or written 

statements shall only be binding if Seller makes express reference to them 

 

3.3 Subsequent amendments of or additions to the contract shalI be subject to 

 

4. Prices 

4.1 Prices shall be quoted ex works or ex Seller’s warehouse without VAT, packing 

and packaging, loading, disassembly, take-back and proper recycling 

and disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment for commercial 

 

Electrical Equipment. Buyer shall be liable for any and all charges, taxes 

or other duties levied in respect of delivery. If the terms of delivery include 

transport to a destination designated by Buyer, transport costs as weIl as the 

cost of any transport insurance desired by Buyer shall be borne by the latter. 

Delivery does not, however, include unloading and subsequent handling. 

Packaging materials will be taken back only by express agreement. 

4.2 Seller reserves the right to modify prices if the order placed is not in accordance 

with the offer submitted. 

 

event that the costs have increased by the time of delivery, Seller shall have 

the right to adjust prices accordingly. 

4.4 In carrying out repair orders, Seller shall provide all services deemed expedient 

and shall charge Buyer for the same on the basis of the work input 

and/or expenditures required. The same holds for any services or additional 

services the expediency of which becomes apparent only as the repair order 

quired. 

4.5 Expenses for estimates of costs of repair and maintenance or for expert 

valuations shall be invoiced to Buyer. 

5. Delivery 

5.1 The period allowed for delivery shall commence at the latest of the following 

dates: 

 

- 

 

c) the date of receipt by Seller of a deposit or security due before delivery of 

the goods in question. 

5.2 Buyer shall obtain whatever licences or approvals may be required from 

authorities or third parties for the construction of plant and equipment. If the 

granting of such licences or approvals is delayed for any reason the delivery 

period shall be extended accordingly. 

5.3 Seller may carry out, and charge Buyer for, partial or advance deliveries. If 

delivery on call is agreed upon, the commodity shall be deemed called off at 

the Iatest one year after the order was placed. 

5.4 In case of unforeseeable circumstances or circumstances beyond the parties 

control, such as all cases of force majeure, which impede compliance with 

the agreed period of delivery, the latter shall be extended in any case for the 

General Terms of Delivery 

issued by the Austrian Electrical and Electronics Industry Association 

 

ance, 

damages in transit, energy shortage and raw materials scarcity, labor 

disputes, and default on performance by a major component supplier who is 

 

irrespective of whether they affect Seller or his subcontractor(s). 

5.5 If a contractual penalty for default of delivery was agreed upon by contracting 

parties when the contract was concluded, it shall be executed as follows, 

and any deviations concerning individual items shall not affect the remaining 

provisions: Where delay in performance can be shown to have occurred 

solely through the fault of Seller, Buyer may claim for each completed week 

of delay an indemnity of at most one half of one per cent, a total of no more 

than 5 %, however, of the value of that part of the goods to be delivered 

which cannot be used on account of Seller’s failure to deliver an essential 

part thereof, provided the Buyer has suffered a damage to the aforesaid 

extent. Assertion of rights of damages exceeding this extent is precluded. 

6. Passage of risk and Place of performance 

6.1 Enjoyment and risk shall pass to Buyer at the time of departure of the goods ex 

works or ex warehouse regardless of the terms of quotation (such as carriage 

paid, C.I.F. etc.) agreed upon. This provision also includes the case of shipment 

being effected, organised and supervised by Seller and the case of delivery being 

made in connection with assembly work to be undertaken by Seller. 

6.2 For services the place of performance shall be the place at which the service 

 

have been agreed upon shall pass to Buyer at the time the services have been 

rendered. 

7. Payment 

7.1 Unless otherwise agreed, one third of the purchase price shall fall due at the 

 

half the delivery period has elapsed and the balance at the time of delivery. 

Irrespective thereof the turnover tax comprised in the amount of the invoice 

shall be paid within 30 days of the invoice date. 

7.2 In the case of part settlements the individual part payments shall fall due 

upon receipt of the respective invoices. The same shall apply to amounts 

invoiced for additional deliveries or resulting from additional agreements 

beyond the scope of the original contract, irrespective of the terms of payment 

agreed upon for the principal delivery. 

7.3 Payment shall be made without any discount free Seller’s domicile in the 

agreed currency. Drafts and checks shaII be accepted on account of payment 

only, with all interest, fees and charges in connection therewith (such as collection 

and discounting charges) to be borne by Buyer. 

7.4 Buyer shall not be entitled to withhold or offset payment on the grounds of 

any warranty claims or other counterclaims. 

7.5 Payment shall be deemed to have been effected on the date at which the 

amount in question is at Seller’s disposal. 

7.6 If Buyer fails to meet the terms of payment or any other obligation arising 

from this or other transactions, Seller may without prejudice to his other 

rights 

a) suspend performance of his own obligations until payments have been 

 

period of delivery to a reasonable extent, 

b) call in debts arisen from this or any other transactions and charge default 

interest amounting to 1.25 % per month plus turnover tax for these amounts 

beginning with the due dates, unless Seller proves costs exceeding this. 

In any case Seller has the right to invoice all expenses arising prior to a 

lawsuit, especially reminder charges and lawyer’s fees. 

7.7 Discounts or bonuses are subject to complete payment in due time. 

7.8 Seller retains title to all goods delivered by him until receipt of all amounts 

invoiced including interests and charges. 

Buyer herewith assigns his claim out of a resale of conditional commodities, 

even if they are processed, transformed or combined with other commodities, 

to Seller to secure the latter’s purchase money claim. In the case 

of resale granting respite Buyer shall have the power of disposal of the product 

under retention of ownership only with the proviso that upon reselling 

 

the assignment in his account books. Upon request Buyer has to notify the 

assigned claim and the debtor thereof to Seller, and to make all information 

and material required for his debt collection available and to notify the assignment 

to the third-party debtor. If the goods are attached or otherwise 

levied upon, Buyer shalI draw attention to Sellers title and immediately 

inform Seller of the attachment or levy.

8. Warranty and acceptance of obligation to repair defects 

 

subject to the conditions hereunder, remedy any defect existing at the time 

of acceptance of the article in question whether due to faulty design, material 

or manufacture, that impairs the functioning of said article. From particulars 

appearing in catalogues, folders, promotional literature as well as 

written or oral statements which have not been included in the agreement no 

warranty obligations may be deduced. 

8.2 Unless special warranty periods operate for individual items the warranty 

period shall be 12 months. These conditions shall also apply to any goods 

 

attached to buildings or the ground. The warranty period begins at the point 

of passage of risk acc. to paragraph 6. 

8.3 The foregoing warranty obligations are conditional upon the Buyer giving 

immediate notice in writing of any defects that have occurred and such notice 

reaching the Seller. Buyer shall prove immediately the presence of a defect, 

in particular he shall make available immediately to Seller all material 

and data in his possession. Non-observance of Buyer’s obligation to give 

immediate notice of the defect invalidates the right of claiming consequential 

harm caused by a defect. Upon receipt of such notice Seller shall, in the 

case of a defect covered by the warranty under 8.1 above, have the option to 

replace the defective goods or defective parts thereof or else to repair them 

on Buyer’s premises or have them returned for repair, or to grant a fair and 

reasonable price reduction. 

8.4 Any expenses incurred in connection with rectifying defects (e. g. expenses 

for assembly and disassembly, transport, waste disposal, travel and siteto-quarters 

time) shall be borne by Buyer. For warranty work on Buyer’s 

premises Buyer shall make available free of charge any assistance, hoisting 

gear, scaffolding and sundry supplies and incidentals that may he required. 

 

8.5 If an article is manufactured by Seller on the basis of design data, design 

- 

 

8.6 Seller’s warranty obligation shall not extend to any defects due to assembly 

and installation work not undertaken by Seller, inadequate equipment, or 

due to non-compliance with installation requirements and operating conditions, 

overloading of parts in excess of the design values stipulated by 

Seller, negligent or faulty handling or the use of inappropriate materials, nor 

for defects attributable to material supplied by Buyer. Nor shall Seller be liable 

for damage due to acts of third parties, atmospheric discharges. Excess 

ment 

of parts subject to natural wear and tear. Seller accepts no warranty for 

the sale of used goods. 

8.7 The warranty shall lapse immediately if, without written consent of Seller, 

tions 

or repairs on any items delivered. 

8.8 Claims acc. to § 933b ABGB are struck by the statute of limitation with 

lapse of the period mentioned under point 8.2. 

8.9 The provisions of sub-paragraphs 8.1 to 8.7 shall apply, mutatis mutandis, to 

all cases where the obligation to repair defects has to be accepted for other 

reasons laid down by law. 

9. Withdrawal from contract 

9.1 Buyer may withdraw from the contract only in the event of delays caused by 

gross negligence on the part of Seller and only after a reasonable period of 

 

registered mail. 

9.2 Irrespective of his other rights Seller shall be entitled to withdraw from the 

contract 

a) if the execution of delivery or the inception or continuation of services to 

be rendered under the contract is made impossible for reasons within the 

responsibility of Buyer and if the delay is extended beyond a reasonable 

 

b) if doubts have arisen as to Buyer’s creditworthiness and if same fails, 

on Seller’s request, to make an advance payment or to provide adequate 

security prior to delivery, or 

c) if, for reasons mentioned in 5.4, the period allowed for delivery is extended 

by more than half of the period originally agreed or by at least 6 

months. 

9.3 For the reasons given above withdrawal from the contract shall also be possible 

in respect of any outstanding part of the delivery or service contracted for. 

9.4 If bankruptcy proceedings are instituted against any contracting party or 

an application for bankruptcy proceedings against that party is not granted 

 

without allowing a period of grace. 

9.5 Without prejudice to Seller’s claim for damages including expenses arising 

prior to a lawsuit, upon withdrawal from contract any open accounts in 

respect of deliveries made or services rendered in whole or in part shall be 

settled according to contract This provision also covers deliveries or services 

not yet accepted by Buyer as weIl as any preparatory acts performed 

by Seller. Seller shall, however, have the option alternatively to require the 

restitution of articles already delivered. 

GENERAL TERMS OF DELIVERY 

9.6 Withdrawal from contract shall have no consequences other than those stipulated 

above. 

9.7 The assertion of claims on the ground of laesio enormis, error, or lapse of 

purpose by the Buyer is excluded. 

10. Disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment 

10.1 The Buyer of electrical/electronic equipment for commercial purposes, in- 

 

 

 

himself the user of the electrical/electronic equipment. If the Buyer is not 

 

by agreement and furnish proof thereof to the Seller. 

10.2 The Buyer incorporated in Austria shall ensure that the Seller is provided 

with all information necessary to meet the Seller’s obligations as manu- 

 

agement 

Act. 

10.3 The Buyer incorporated in Austria is liable vis-à-vis the Seller for any dam- 

 

tions 

according to Article 10. The Buyer shall bear the burden of proof of 

performance of this obligation. 

11. Seller’s liability 

 

the damage in question is proved to be due to intentional acts or acts of gross 

negligence, within the limits of statutory provisions. Seller shall not be liable 

for damage due to acts of ordinary negligence nor for consequential 

 

or interest or damage resulting from third-party claims against buyer. 

11.2 Seller shall not be liable for damages in case of non-compliance with instructions 

for assembly, commissioning and operation (such as are contained 

in instructions for use) or non-compliance with licensing requirements. 

11.3 Claims that exceed the contractual penalties that were agreed on are excluded 

from the respective title. 

12. Industrial property rights and copyrights 

12.1 Buyer shall indemnify Seller and hold him harmless against any claims for 

any infringement of industrial property rights raised against him if Seller 

manufactures an article pursuant to any design data, design drawings, mod- 

 

cations 

as well as samples, catalogues, prospectuses, pictures and the like 

shall remain the intellectual property of Seller and are subject to the relevant 

statutory provisions governing reproduction, imitation, competition etc. The 

provisions of 22 above shall also cover design documents. 

13. General 

Should individual provisions of the contract or of these provisions be invalid 

the validity of the other provisions shall not be affected. The invalid provision 

shall be replaced by a valid one, which comes as close to the target goal 

as possible. 

14. Jurisdiction and applicable law 

Any litigations arising under the contract including litigations over the existence 

or non-existence thereof shall fall within the exclusive jurisdiction 

irksgericht 

Innere Stadt, Vienna, shall have exclusive jurisdiction if Seller 

is domiciled in Vienna. The contract is subject to Austrian law excluding 

the referral rules. Application of the UN Convention on Contracts for the 

lnternational Sale of Goods is renounced. 

Last revised in May 2007

THE COMPANY 

HEADQUARTERS 

SCHRACK TECHNIK GMBH 

Seybelgasse 13, A-1230 Vienna 

PHONE +43(0)1/866 85-5900 

FAX +43(0)1/866 85-98804 

E-MAIL export@schrack.com 

K-ALEA-EN9 

BELGIUM 

SCHRACK TECHNIK B.V.B.A 

Twaalfapostelenstraat 14 

BE-9051 St-Denijs-Westrem 

PHONE +32 9/384 79 92 

FAX +32 9/384 87 69 

E-MAIL info@schrack.be 

CROATIA 

SCHRACK TECHNIK D.O.O. 

Zavrtnica 17 

HR-10000 Zagreb 

PHONE +385 1/605 55 00 

FAX +385 1/605 55 66 

E-MAIL schrack@schrack.hr 

POLAND 

SCHRACK TECHNIK 

POLSKA SP.Z.O.O. 

ul. Staniewicka 5 

PL-03-310 Warszawa 

PHONE +48 22/331 48 31 

FAX +48 22/331 48 33 

E-MAIL se@schrack.pl 

CONNECTING COMPETENCE. 

SCHRACK COMPANIES 

ROMANIA 

SCHRACK TECHNIK SRL 

Str. Simion Barnutiu nr. 15 

RO-410204 Oradea 

PHONE +40 259/435 887 

FAX +40 259/412 892 

E-MAIL schrack@schrack.ro 

SERBIA 


Kumodraska 260 

RS-11000 Beograd 

PHONE +38 1/11 309 2600 

FAX +38 1/11 309 2620 

E-MAIL office@schrack.co.yu 

SLOVAKIA 

SCHRACK TECHNIK SPOL. SR.O. 

Langsfeldova 2 

SK-03601 Martin 

PHONE +42 1/43 422 16 41 

FAX +42 1/43 423 95 56 

E-MAIL martin@schrack.sk 

SLOVENIA 


Pameče 175 

SLO-2380 Slovenj Gradec 

PHONE +38 6/2 883 92 00 

FAX +38 6/2 884 34 71 

E-MAIL schrack.sg@schrack.si 

CZECH REPUBLIC 

SCHRACK TECHNIK SPOL. SR.O. 

Dolnomecholupska 2 

CZ-10200 Praha 10 – Hostivar 

PHONE +42(0)2/810 08 264 

FAX +42(0)2/810 08 462 

E-MAIL praha@schrack.cz 

HUNGARY 

SCHRACK TECHNIK KFT. 

Vidor u. 5 

H-1172 Budapest 

PHONE +36 1/253 14 01 

FAX +36 1/253 14 91 

E-MAIL schrack@schrack.hu 

WWW.SCHRACK.COM

W POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS W MODULAR ...

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?